LG | 60PZ570T | LG 60PZ570T Owner’s Manual

OWNER’S MANUAL
LED LCD TV / LCD TV /
PLASMA TV
Please read this manual carefully before operating the
set and retain it for future reference.
www.lg.com
2
LICENSES
LICENSES
Supported licenses may differ by model. For more information about licenses, visit www.lg.com.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC,
a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation.
This is an official DivX Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com
for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ENGLISH
ENG
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be
registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) movies.
To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete your
registration.
“DivX Certified® to play DivX® and DivX Plus® HD (H.264/MKV) video up to 1080p
HD including premium content.”
“DivX®, DivX Certified®, DivX Plus® HD and associated logos are trademarks of
Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under license.”
“Covered by one or more of the following U.S. patents :
7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274”
NOTE
yyImage shown may differ from your TV.
yyYour TV’s OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual.
yyThe available menus and options may differ from the input source or product model that you are using.
3
LICENSES
ENGLISH
ENG
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
LICENSES
46 ENTERTAINMENT
ENGLISH
ENG
24 REMOTE CONTROL
46
46
47
49
52
53
53
55
55
56
57
58
59
59
60
61
27
28
28
28
61
62
62
63
6
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
6
10
11
16
16
16
19
20
22
23
Unpacking
Separate purchase
Parts and buttons
Lifting and moving the TV
Setting up the TV
- Attaching the stand
- Not using the Desk-Type stand
- Mounting on a table
- Mounting on a wall
- Tidying cables
Magic Motion Remote Control Functions
- Registering Magic Motion remote control
- How to use Magic Motion Remote Control
- Precautions to Take when Using the
Magic Motion Remote Control
29 WATCHING TV
29
29
29
30
30
31
32
32
35
35
36
37
38
40
41
41
41
42
42
43
44
45
Connecting to an antenna
- Connecting an antenna
- Connecting with a satellite dish
Turning the TV on for the first time
Watching TV
Accessing the Home menu
Managing programmes
- Automatically setting up programme
- Cable DTV Setting
- Satellite DTV Setting
- Tivu Programme List Update
- Manually setting up programme (In
digital mode)
- Manually setting up programme (In
analogue mode)
- Editing your programme list
- Booster
- Using favourite programmes
- CI [Common interface] Information
Using additional options
- Adjusting aspect ratio
- Changing AV modes
- Using the input list
Using the Quick menu
66
67
68
71
72
74
76
76
77
77
78
78
79
80
80
81
84
85
88
91
91
91
92
92
92
92
Network Connection
- Connecting to a wired network
- Connecting to a wireless network
- When a security code is already set
- Network Status
Premium Account Function
- Notice
LG Apps Function
- Registration LG Apps
- Sign in with your LG Apps account
- Using LG Apps
- Using My Apps
Web Browser Function
- Using Web Browser
- Browsing Favourite Websites
- Browsing Websites by Directly Entering
Address
- Viewing Visited Website List
Smart Share Function
- Connecting USB storage devices
- Connecting DLNA DMP (Digital Living
Network Alliance, Digital Media Player)
- Connecting DLNA DMR (Digital Living
Network Alliance, Digital Media Render)
- Browsing files
- Viewing Videos
- DivX® VOD Guide
- Viewing Photos
- Listening to music
Media Link Function
- Media Link Connection
- Using Media Link
- Viewing Movies
- Using Music Section
- Using TV Programme Section
- Installing Plug-Ins
DVR Function
- Precautions when using the USB Device
- Timeshift (PAUSE & REPLAY OF LIVE
TV)
- Recording
- Schedule
- Recorded TV
EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)
Function (In digital mode)
- Switch on/off EPG
- Select a programme
- NOW/NEXT Guide Mode
- 8 Day Guide Mode
- Date Change Mode
- Extended Description Box
TABLE OF CONTENTS
93 3D IMAGING
126
93
94
94
95
95
126
126
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
3D Technology
When using 3D Glasses
3D Imaging Viewing Range
Viewing 3D Imaging
- Setting 3D Imaging
97 CUSTOMIZING TV SETTINGS
97
98
98
99
104
107
109
110
113
114
The SETUP Menu
Customizing Settings
- SETUP Settings
- PICTURE Settings
- AUDIO Settings
- TIME Settings
- LOCK Settings
- OPTION Settings
- NETWORK Settings
- SUPPORT Settings
MAKING CONNECTIONS
116 Connection Overview
117 Connecting to a HD receiver, DVD, or
VCR player
117 - HDMI Connection
117 - DVI to HDMI Connection
118 - Component Connection
118 - Euro Scart Connection
119 - Composite Connection
119 Connecting to a PC
120 - HDMI Connection
120 - DVI to HDMI Connection
121 - RGB Connection
122 Connecting to an Audio System
122 - Digital Optical Audio Connection
122 Connecting to Headphone Connection
123 Connecting to a USB
123 Connecting to a CI Module
124 Connecting the Wireless Media Box
124 SIMPLINK Connection
125 - Activating and Using the SIMPLINK
menus
TELETEXT
Switch On/Off
Simple Text
- Page selection
Top Text
- Block / Group / Page Selection
- Direct Page Selection
Fastext
- Page selection
Special Teletext Function
128
DIGITAL TELETEXT
128 Teletext within digital service
128 Teletext in digital service
129
129
130
130
130
130
131
MAINTENANCE
Updating the TV Firmware
Cleaning Your TV
- Screen and frame
- Cabinet and stand
- Power cord
Preventing “Image burn” or “Burn-in” on
your TV screen
132
TROUBLESHOOTING
134
SPECIFICATIONS
145
IR CODES
146
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE
SETUP
146 RS-232C Setup
146 Type of connector;
D-Sub 9-Pin Male
147 RS-232C Configurations
148 Communication Parameters
148 Command reference list
149 Transmission / Receiving Protocol
155
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
ENGLISH
ENG
115
5
6
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Unpacking
Check your product box for the following items. If there are any missing accessories, contact the local
dealer where you purchased your product. The illustrations in this manual may differ from the actual product
and item.
ENGLISH
ENG
Remote control and batteries
(AAA)
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CD
Owner’s manual
Polishing cloth1
(Depending on model)
Cleaning cloths (Mitt)2
(Depending on model)
Ferrite core
(Depending on model)
1 Gently wipe the spots on the cabinet with the polishing cloth.
2 Wipe spots on the exterior only with the cleaning cloths.
Do not wipe roughly when removing stains. Excessive pressure
may cause scratches or discolouration.
For cleaning front frame, please slowly wipe in one direction
after spraying water 1-2 times on cleaning cloths. Please remove
excessive moisture after cleaning. Excessive moisture may
cause water stains on the frame.
Water
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
7
Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**, 32/42/47/55LW47**
x8
M4 x 12
Screw for assembly
Cable holder
(Depending on model)
Screw for fixing
FPR 3D glasses1
(Only 32/37LV37**,
(Only 32/42/47/55LW47**)
32/37LV47**, 32LW47**)
Only 47LK95**
x8
M4 x 20
Protection cover
FPR 3D glasses1
1 The number of 3D glasses may differ depending on the country.
Power cord
ENGLISH
ENG
Screw for assembly
8
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**
x4
M4 x 26
x3
M5x14.5
x4
x3
x4
M4 x 28
M5 x 24
M4 x 28
Only 50PZ57**, 50PZ75**, 50PZ95**
Only 60PZ57**
x4
M5x14.5
Only 60PZ75**, 60PZ95**
Screw for assembly
Protection cover
tape
Cable holder
Power cord holder
Power cord
3D glasses
(AG-S250)
Magic Motion remote
control, Strap,
Batteries (AA)
(Only 50/60PZ95**)
Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(Only 50/60PZ95**)
ENGLISH
ENG
Protection cover
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
9
CAUTION
yy
Do not use any unapproved items to ensure the safety and product life span.
yy
Any damages or injuries by using unapproved items are not covered by the warranty.
NOTE
The items supplied with your product may vary depending on the model.
yy
Product specifications or contents of this manual may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade
yy
of product functions.
How to use the ferrite core (Only Plasma TV)
yy
1 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the PC audio cable.
Wind the PC audio cable on the ferrite core three times. Place the ferrite core close to the TV.
10 mm(+ / - 5 mm)
[to an External device]
[to the TV]
[Figure 1]
(Gray)
[Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
2 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the power cable.
Wind the power cable on the ferrite core once. Place the ferrite core close to the TV and a wall plug.
[to the TV]
(1)
(2)
[Figure 2]
(Black)
[Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
3 Use the ferrite core to reduce the electromagnetic interference in the LAN cable.
Wind the LAN cable once on the small ferrite core and three times on the big ferrite core. Place the
ferrite core close to the TV.
[to an
External
device]
A (Gray) B (Gray)
[to the TV]
A
A
(1)
B
(2)
[Figure 3]
[Cross Section of
Ferrite Core]
-If there are two ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 3(1).
-If there are three ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 1 and 3(1).
-If there are four ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 2(1) and 3(2).
-If there are six ferrite cores, follow as shown in Figures 1, 2(2) and 3(2).
yy
For an optimal connection, HDMI cables and USB devices should have bezels less than 10 mm thick
and 18 mm width. (Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**, 32/42/47/55LW47**)
*A
*B
10 mm
18 mm
ENGLISH
ENG
[to a wall plug]
10
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Separate purchase
Separate purchase items can be changed or modified for quality improvement without any notification.
Contact your dealer for buying these items.
These devices only work with compatible LG LED LCD TV, LCD TV or Plasma TV.
Wireless Media Box
3D glasses
(AN-WL100E, AN-WL100ET)
(AG-S230, AG-S250, AG-S270)
(Only 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**) (Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**,
50/60PZ95**)
ENGLISH
ENG
Magic Motion remote control
(AN-MR200)
Wireless LAN for Broadband/
DLNA Adaptor
(AN-WF100)
(Only 32/37/42/47LV37**,
32/37/42/47LV47**,
32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**,
50/60PZ75**)
FPR 3D glasses1
(AG-F2**)
(Only 32/42/47/55LW47**,
47LK95**)
LG USB for VOD
(AN-UM200)
(Only France)
Video Call Camera2
(AN-VC300)
(Depending on model)
1 The model name or design may be changed depending on the upgrade of product functions,
manufacturer's circumstances or policies.
2 Video Call Camera can be used with some LG TVs.
Video Call Camera is not available in every country.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
11
Parts and buttons
Image shown may differ from your TV.
yy
NOTE
The TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption and the TV should
yy
be turned off if it will not be watched for some time, as this will reduce energy consumption.
The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture
is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost.
CAUTION
yy
Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from
fragments of glass, or the TV may fall.
yy
Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged.
yy
Some models have a thin film attached on to the screen and this must not be removed.
ENGLISH
ENG
12
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**, 32/42/47/55LW47**
Screen
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power Indicator
Speakers
Side connection panel
Touch buttons2
ENGLISH
ENG
Rear connection panel
(See p.115)
Only 32/37/42/47LV375G,
32/37/42/47LV375S, 32/37/42/47LV370S,
32/37/42/47LV470S, 32/42/47/55LW470S
Touch button2
Description
Turns the power on or off.
Changes the input source.
Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input.
Adjusts the volume level.
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
NOTE
yy
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
13
Only 47LK95**
P
USB Apps
USB IN
H/P
Screen
OK
IN 3
Buttons
IN 2
/DVI
/DVI
INPUT
IN 1 (ARC)
/DVI
HOME
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Speakers
Power Indicator
Side connection panel
Rear connection panel
(See p.115)
AUDIO IN(RGB/DVI)
COMPONENT
IN
VIDEO
OPTICAL DIGITAL
RGB IN (PC)
AUDIO OUT
RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE)
AV IN 2
R
VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R
L
AUDIO
13/18V
700mA Max
LNB IN
Satellite
Button
ANTENNA
IN
Description
Turns the power on or off.
Changes the input source.
Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input.
Adjusts the volume level.
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
NOTE
yy
You can set the power indicator light to on or off by selecting OPTION in the Home menu - SETUP.
ENGLISH
ENG
LAN
14
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Only 50/60PZ57**
Screen
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power Indicator
Speakers
Side connection
panel
Touch buttons2
ENGLISH
ENG
Rear connection panel
(See p.115)
Only 50/60PZ570G, 50/60PZ570S,
50/60PZ575S
Touch button2
Description
Turns the power on or off.
Changes the input source.
Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input.
Adjusts the volume level.
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Only 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**
15
Screen
Remote control and
intelligent1 sensors
Power Indicator
Speakers
Side connection
panel
Touch buttons2
ENGLISH
ENG
Rear connection panel
(See p.115)
Only 50/60PZ750G, 50/60PZ750S,
50/60PZ755S, 50/60PZ950G,
50/60PZ950S, 50/60PZ955S
Touch button2
Description
Turns the power on or off.
Changes the input source.
Accesses the Home menu, or saves your input and exits the menus.
Selects the highlighted menu option or confirms an input.
Adjusts the volume level.
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
1 Intelligent sensor - Adjusts the image quality and brightness based on the surrounding environment.
2 All of the buttons are touch sensitive and can be operated through simple touch with your finger.
16
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Lifting and moving the TV
Setting up the TV
Please note the following advice to prevent the
TV from being scratched or damaged and for safe
transportation regardless of its type and size.
Put your TV on a pedestal stand and mount the TV
on a table or wall.
CAUTION
yy
Avoid touching the screen at all times, as
this may result in damage to the screen.
It is recommended to move the TV in the box
yy
or packing material that the TV originally came
in.
Before moving or lifting the TV, disconnect the
yy
power cord and all cables.
When holding the TV, the screen should face
yy
away from you to avoid damage.
Attaching the stand
If you are not mounting the TV to a wall, use the
following instructions to attach the stand.
Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**,
32/42/47/55LW47**
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth on
yy
the surface to protect the screen from damage. Make sure no objects press against the
screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the
Stand Base of the TV.
ENGLISH
ENG
Model
Hold the top and bottom of the TV frame firmly.
yy
Make sure not to hold the transparent part,
speaker, or speaker grill area.
32/37/42/47LV37**
32/37/42/47LV47**
32/42/47/55LW47**
Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
M4 x 12
4
Stand Body
When transporting a large TV, there should be
yy
at least 2 people.
When transporting the TV by hand, hold the
yy
TV as shown in the following illustration.
Stand Base
When transporting the TV, do not expose the
yy
TV to jolts or excessive vibration.
When transporting the TV, keep the TV
yy
upright, never turn the TV on its side or tilt
towards the left or right.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
3 Assemble the TV as shown.
17
Only 47LK95**
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth on
yy
the surface to protect the screen from damage. Make sure no objects press against the
screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the
Stand Base of the TV.
4 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4 screws.
Model
32/37/42/47LV37**
32/37/42/47LV47**
32/42/47/55LW47**
Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
M4 x 12
4
Model
47LK95**
Screw for
assembly
M4 x 20
Number of
screws
4
Stand Body
ENGLISH
ENG
Stand Base
3 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4 screws.
CAUTION
yy
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent the TV
from tilting forward. Do not over tighten.
Model
47LK95**
Screw for
assembly
M4 x 20
Number of
screws
4
CAUTION
yy
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent the TV
from tilting forward. Do not over tighten.
18
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Only 50/60PZ57**
Only 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
1 Lay the TV with the screen side down on a flat
surface.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
yy
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the
Stand Base of the TV.
Model
50PZ57**
60PZ57**
surface.
Screw for
assembly
M5 x 14.5
M5 x 24
Number of
screws
3
3
Lay a foam mat or soft protective cloth
yy
on the surface to protect the screen from
damage. Make sure no objects press
against the screen.
2 Assemble the parts of the Stand Body with the
Stand Base of the TV.
Model
50PZ75**
50PZ95**
60PZ75**
60PZ95**
Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
M5x14.5
3
M5x14.5
4
Stand Body
Stand Body
ENGLISH
ENG
Stand Base
3 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4 screws.
Model
50PZ57**
60PZ57**
Screw for
assembly
M4 x 26
M4 x 28
Stand Base
Number of
screws
4
4
Stand Body
Stand Base
CAUTION
yy
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
3 Secure the TV and the stand with the 4 screws.
Model
50PZ75**
50PZ95**
60PZ75**
60PZ95**
Screw for
assembly
Number of
screws
M4 x 26
4
M4 x 28
4
CAUTION
Not using the Desk-Type stand
Only 47LK95**
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use the
Protection cover. This will protect the opening from
accumulating dust and dirt.
Push the supplied protection cover into the
yy
opening at the bottom of the TV until it locks in
place.
Protection cover
Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**
When installing the wall mounting bracket, use the
protection cover. This will protect the opening from
accumulating dust and dirt.
Push the supplied protection cover into the
yy
opening at the bottom of the TV until it locks in
place.
Attach the protection cover tape.
yy
Protection cover tape
Protection cover
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
Tighten the screws firmly to prevent
the TV from tilting forward. Do not over
tighten.
19
20
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Mounting on a table
Securing the TV to a table
1 Lift and tilt the TV into its upright position on a
table.
-Leave a 10 cm (minimum) space from the
wall for proper ventilation.
Only 32/37LV37**, 32/37LV47**, 32LW47**
Fix the TV to a table to prevent from tilting forward,
damage, and potential injury.
Mount the TV on a table, and then insert and
tighten the supplied screw on the rear of the stand.
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
2 Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.
CAUTION
ENGLISH
ENG
yyDo not place the TV near or on sources of
heat, as this may result in fire or other damage.
NOTE
yySwivel 20 degrees to the left or right and adjust
the angle of the TV to suit your view.
WARNING
yyTo prevent the TV from falling over, the TV
should be securely attached to the floor/wall
per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking,
or rocking the TV may cause injury.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Securing the TV to a wall
(This feature is not available for all models.)
21
Using the Kensington security system
(This feature is not available for all models.)
The Kensington security system connector is
located at the rear of the TV. For more information
of installation and using, refer to the manual
provided with the Kensington security system or
visit http://www.kensington.com.
Connect the Kensington security system cable
between the TV and a table.
1 Insert and tighten the eye-bolts, or TV brackets
and bolts on the back of the TV.
-If there are bolts inserted at the eye-bolts
position, remove the bolts first.
wall.
Match the location of the wall bracket and the
eye-bolts on the rear of the TV.
3 Connect the eye-bolts and wall brackets tightly
with a sturdy rope.
Make sure to keep the rope horizontal with the
flat surface.
CAUTION
yy
Make sure that children do not climb on
or hang on the TV.
NOTE
yy
Use a platform or cabinet that is strong
and large enough to support the TV
securely.
ENGLISH
ENG
2 Mount the wall brackets with the bolts to the
22
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Mounting on a wall
Model
Attach a wall mount bracket at the rear of the TV
carefully and install the wall mount bracket on a
solid wall perpendicular to the floor. When you
attach the TV to other building materials, please
contact qualified personnel.
LG recommends that wall mounting be performed
by a qualified professional installer.
50PZ57**
50PZ75**
50PZ95**
VESA (A x B)
400 x 400
Standard screw
M6
Number of screws 4
Wall mount
PSW400B,
bracket
PSW400BG
60PZ57**
60PZ75**
60PZ95**
600 x 400
M8
4
PSW600B,
PSW600BG
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
10 cm
ENGLISH
ENG
Make sure to use screws and wall mount bracket
that meet the VESA standard. Standard dimensions for the wall mount kits are described in the
following table.
Separate purchase(Wall Mounting Bracket)
Model
32LV37**
32LV47**
32LW47**
VESA (A x B)
200 x 100
Standard screw
M4
Number of screws 4
Wall mount
LSW100B,
bracket
LSW100BG
Model
37LV37**
37LV47**
47LK95**
200 x 200
M6
4
LSW200B,
LSW200BG
42/47LV37**
42/47LV47**
42/47/55LW47**
VESA (A x B)
400 x 400
Standard screw
M6
Number of screws 4
Wall mount
LSW400B, LSW400BG
bracket
CAUTION
yy
Disconnect the power first, and then move or
install the TV. Otherwise electric shock may
occur.
yy
If you install the TV on a ceiling or slanted
wall, it may fall and result in injury. Use an
authorized LG wall mount bracket and
contact the local dealer or qualified
personnel.
yy
Do not over tighten the screws as this may
cause damage to the TV and void your
warranty.
yy
Use the screws and wall mount bracket that
meet the VESA standard. Any damages or
injuries by misuse or using an improper
accessory are not covered by the warranty.
NOTE
yy
Use the screws that are listed on the VESA
standard screw specifications.
yy
The wall mount kit includes an installation
manual and necessary parts.
yy
The length of screws may differ depending
on the wall mount. Make sure to use the
proper length.
yy
For more information, refer to the manual
supplied with the wall mount bracket.
ASSEMBLING AND PREPARING
Tidying cables
23
Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**
Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**,
32/42/47/55LW47**
1 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable
1 Install the Power Cord Holder and Power
Cord. It will help prevent the power cable from
being removed by accident.
Holder on the TV back cover.
Power Cord Holder
Only 47LK95**
2 Gather and bind the cables with the Cable
1 Gather and bind the cables with the cable
management clip.
Holder. Install the LAN cable as shown to
reduce the electromagnetic wave.
2 Fix the cable management clip firmly to the TV.
ENGLISH
ENG
Cable Holder
Cable Management Clip
NOTE
Do not move the TV by holding the cable
yy
management clip, as the cable management
clip may break, and injuries and damage to
the TV may occur.
CAUTION
yy
Do not move the TV by holding the Cable
Holder & Power Cord Holder, as the
Cable holders may break, and injuries
and damage to the TV may occur.
24
REMOTE CONTROL
REMOTE CONTROL
The descriptions in this manual are based on the buttons on the remote control.
Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AAA) matching
and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. Be sure to
point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control.
yy
ENGLISH
ENG
(POWER)
Turns the TV on or off.
LIGHT
Illuminates the remote control buttons.
ENERGY SAVING (See p.99)
Adjusts the brightness of the screen to reduce energy consumption.
AV MODE (See p.43)
Selects an AV mode.
INPUT (See p.44)
Changes the input source; Turns the TV on.
TV/RAD
Selects Radio, TV and DTV programme.
]
Alphanumeric buttons
Enters letters and numbers.
LIST (See p.40)
Accesses the saved programme list.
(Space)
Opens an empty space on the screen keyboard.
Q.VIEW
Returns to the previously viewed programme.
REMOTE CONTROL
25
+Adjusts the volume level.
MARK
Selects a menu or option.
FAV (See p.41)
Accesses your favourite programme list.
CHAR/NUM
Switches between Letter and Number input modes.
3D (Only 3D models) (See p.93)
Uses for viewing 3D video.
RATIO (See p.42)
Resizes an image.
DELETE
Deletes letters and numbers.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
P
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
PAGE
Moves to the previous or next screen.
Premium
Accesses the Premium menus.
Q. MENU (See p.45)
Accesses the Quick menus.
3D OPTION (Only 3D models) (See p.93)
Used for viewing 3D video.
Direct access to your internet portal of entertainment and news services
developed by Orange. (Only France)
Navigation buttons (up/down/left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
LIGHT
ENERGY
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/
RAD
OK
Selects menus or options and confirms your input.
SAVING
1.,;@ 2 abc 3 def
BACK
Returns to the previous level.
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
0
[
LIST
GUIDE
Shows programme guide.
Q.VIEW
MARK
EXIT
Clears all on-screen displays and return to TV viewing.
FAV
CHAR/NUM
RATIO
P
P
A
G
E
DELETE
MUTE
SMART TV
Premium
Home
@
OK
BACK Q.MENU EXIT
GUIDE
3D OPTION
L/R SELECT
LIVE TV
RATIO
GUIDE
INFO
AD
APP/*
ENGLISH
ENG
Home
Accesses the Home menu.
26
REMOTE CONTROL
Coloured buttons
These access special functions in some menus.
TELETEXT BUTTONS (See p.126)
These buttons are used for teletext.
For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.
ENGLISH
ENG
SUBTITLE
Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode.
)
Control buttons (
Controls the Premium contents, DVR or Smart Share menus or the SIMPLINK compatible devices (USB or SIMPLINK or DVR).
LIVE TV (See p.80)
Return to the LIVE TV.
FREEZE
Freezes the current frame while using the TV, AV, Component, RGB-PC, or
HDMI input source.
REC
Uses to adjust DVR menu.
INFO (See p.91)
Views the information of the current programme and screen.
AD
Switches the Audio Description On or Off.
RATIO (See p.42)
Resizes an image.
GUIDE
Shows programme guide.
SIMPLINK (See p.124)
Accesses the AV devices connected to the TV;
Opens the SIMPLINK menu.
APP/*
Select the MHP TV menu source. (Only Italy)
(Depending on model)
LIGHT
ENERGY
AV MODE
INPUT
TV/
RAD
SAVING
1.,;@ 2 abc 3 def
4 ghi 5 jkl 6 mno
7pqrs 8 tuv 9 wxyz
0
[
LIST
Q.VIEW
MARK
FAV
CHAR/NUM
3D
P
DELETE
MUTE
SMART TV
3D OPTION
Premium Home
Q.MENU
OK
BACK GUIDE EXIT
RATIO
INFO
AD
APP/*
P
A
G
E
REMOTE CONTROL
27
Magic Motion Remote Control Functions
This item is not included for all models.
Refer to the Magic Motion Remote Control manual for operating instructions.
Please read this manual carefully and use the TV correctly.
When the message "Magic motion remote control battery is low. Change the battery." is displayed, replace the battery.
To replace batteries, open the battery cover, replace batteries (1.5 V AA) matching
and ends to the label inside the compartment, and close the battery cover. Be
sure to point the remote control toward the remote control sensor on the TV.
To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse.
CAUTION
Do not mix old and new batteries, as this may damage the remote control
yy
Pointer (RF transmitter)
Blinks the light when operating.
Home
Accesses the Home menu.
OK
Selects menus or options and
confirms your input.
Press this button to display the
pointer when it disappears from the
screen. You can control the TV by
selecting Quick Menu on the screen.
- If you press the Navigation button
while moving the pointer on the
screen, the pointer disappears, and
the Magic Motion remote control
works as a common remote control.
To display the pointer again, shake
the Magic Motion remote control
from side to side within two minutes
after it disappeared. If two minutes
have passed, press the OK button
to display the pointer.
Navigation buttons (up/down/
left/right)
Scrolls through menus or options.
MUTE
Mutes all sounds.
Home Menu
Programme List
Only 3D models
Quick Menu
+Adjusts the volume level.
P ꕌꕍ
Scrolls through the saved programmes.
ENGLISH
ENG
(POWER)
Turns the TV on or off.
28
REMOTE CONTROL
Registering Magic Motion
remote control
It is necessary to ‘pair’ (register) the Magic Motion
remote control to your TV before it will work.
How to register the Magic Motion remote control
To register the remote control, press the OK button
on the remote control while aiming it at your TV.
How to re-register the Magic Motion remote
control after registration failure
Reset the remote control by pressing and holding
both the OK and MUTE buttons for 5 seconds.
(Once the reset is complete, the light on the
pointer blinks.) Then repeat the above procedure
to register the remote control.
How to use Magic Motion
Remote Control
1 Press OK button if there is no pointer on your
ENGLISH
ENG
TV screen. The pointer will then appear on the
screen.
If the pointer has not been used for a certain
period of time, it will disappear.
2 You can move the pointer by aiming the Pointer
Receiver of the remote control at your TV then
move it left, right, up or down.
If the pointer does not work properly after
clicking the OK button, leave the remote
control for 10 seconds then use it again.
Precautions to Take when
Using the Magic Motion
Remote Control
yyUse the remote control within the maximum
communication distance (10 m). Using the
remote control beyond this distance, or with an
object obstructing it, may cause a
communication failure.
yyA communication failure may occur due to
nearby devices. Electrical devices such as a
microwave oven or wireless LAN product may
cause interference, as this will use the same
bandwidth (2.4 GHz) as the Magic Motion
Remote Control.
yyThe Magic Motion Remote Control may be
damaged or may malfunction if it is dropped or
receives a heavy impact.
yyWhen playing a game using the Magic Motion
Remote Control, hold it securely by wrapping
its strap around your wrist and adjusting the
length with the adjustable ring.
yyTake care not to bump into nearby furniture
or other people when using the Magic Motion
Remote Control.
yyManufacturer and installer cannot provide
service related to human safety as the
applicable wireless device has possibility of
electric wave interference.
yyIt is recommended that an Access Point (AP)
be located more than 1 m away from the TV. If
the AP is installed closer than 1 m, the magic
motion remote control may not perform as
expected due to frequency interference.
WATCHING TV
29
WATCHING TV
Connecting with a satellite dish
Connecting to an antenna
Connect the TV to a satellite dish to a satellite
socket with a satellite RF cable (75 ).
(Only satellite models)
Connect an antenna to watch TV while referring to
the following.
To prevent damage do not connect to the mains
outlet until all connections are made between the
devices.
Connecting an antenna
Connect the TV to a wall antenna socket with an
RF cable (75 ).
Wall Antenna
Socket
NOTE
Use a signal splitter to use more than 2 TVs.
yy
If the image quality is poor, install a signal
yy
amplifier properly to improve the image
quality.
If the image quality is poor with an antenna
yy
connected, try to realign the antenna in the
correct direction.
An antenna cable and converter are not
yy
supplied.
ENGLISH
ENG
Satellite
Dish
30
WATCHING TV
Turning the TV on for the
first time
When you turn the TV on for the first time, the
Initial setting screen appears. Select a language
and customize the basic settings.
1 Connect the power cord to a power outlet.
2 In Standby mode, press
TV on.
(POWER) to turn the
The Initial setting screen appears if you turn
the TV on for the first time.
NOTE
You can also access Factory Reset by
yy
accessing OPTION in the Home menuSETUP.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to customize
your TV settings according to your preferences.
ENGLISH
ENG
Language

Mode Setting

Power Indicator

Country

Time Zone

Set Password

Auto Tuning
Selects a language to display.
Selects Home Use for the
home environment.
Sets the power indicator.
(When you select Home Use
from Mode Setting - only
LED LCD TV)
NOTE
For those countries without confirmed
yy
DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV
features might not work, depending on
the DTV broadcasting environment.
When France is selected for Country,
yy
password is not ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ but ‘1’, ‘2’,
‘3’, ‘4’.
To display images in the best quality for
yy
your home environment, select Home
Use.
Store Demo is suitable for the retail
yy
environment.
If you select Store Demo, any
yy
customized settings will switch back to
the default settings of Store Demo in 5
minutes.
4 When the basic settings are complete,
press OK.
NOTE
yy
If you do not complete the Initial setting, it
will appear whenever the TV turns on.
yy
Disconnect the power cord from the
power outlet when you do not use the TV
for a long period of time.
Selects a country to display.
(Depending on model)
Selects the time zone and
daylight saving.
(When Russia is selected for
Country)
5 To turn the TV off, press
(POWER).
Sets the password.
(When France is selected for
Country)
Scans and saves available
programmes automatically.
Watching TV
1 In Standby mode, press
TV on.
(POWER) to turn the
2 Press INPUT and select Antenna.
3 To turn the TV off, press
(POWER).
The TV switches to Standby mode.
WATCHING TV
31
Accessing the Home menu
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of the following menus and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you want and press OK.
4 When you are finished, press EXIT.
1
2
3
4
Sat. Jan. 1, 2011 12:00
Premium
5
6
Sign In
Exit
LG Apps
HOT
NEW
UCC Service
7
Movie Online
Unit convertor
Puzzle
National-flag
Horoscope
Mah-Jong
Winesound
Weather Info
World Nature
8
INPUT
Photo Album
5:05 ~ 5:55
SETUP
Social Network Service
GUIDE
9
LG Apps
Web Browser
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Media Link
Arrow
Sudoku
My Apps
Description
Current Date, Time
Channel programme info
Function card: You can enjoy various content files by selecting each
card and you can edit the premium card by selecting 5 items.
Function card position
Sign In
Exit
Current watching channel screen
INPUT, SETUP, GUIDE menu.
Launcher bar
ENGLISH
ENG
Search
32
WATCHING TV
Managing programmes
Automatically setting up
programme
Selecting Antenna,
Use this to automatically find and store all
available programmes.
When you start auto programming, all previously
stored service information will be deleted.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
Selecting Cable,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Auto
Tuning and press OK.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Cable
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Auto
Tuning and press OK.
7 Press the Navigation buttons or Number
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Antenna and press OK.
6 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available
programmes automatically.
ENGLISH
ENG
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yyIf the TV scans a blocked programme, you will
be prompted to enter your password to keep the
programme scanned.
yyYou can store up to 1,200 programmes (Except
for Satellite models) or 6,000 programmes(Only
satellite models). The number of programmes
that you can store differs depending on the
broadcasting signal environment.
yyWhen select Italy in the Country menu, if the pop
up is displayed when the conflicted programme
after Auto Tuning, select a broadcaster for
conflicting programme number to solve.
yyWhen select UK in the Country menu, if the pop
up is displayed when the conflicted programme
after Auto Tuning, select a regions, country for
conflicting programme number to solve.
yyWhen selected Norway in the Country menu,
If Network name is recognized more than two
after Auto Tuning, you can select your desired
one. Programme lists are arranged based on the
selected Network name. (Only Nordic models)
yyIn the following country, DVB cable can be used
: Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland,
Denmark, Austria, Finland, Norway, Slovenia,
Hungary, Ukraine, Bulgaria, Ireland, Poland, Romania, Russia, Lithuania, Estonia, Latvia, Spain,
Czech. (The supported country can be added.)
and press OK.
Service Operator and press OK.
buttons to scroll make appropriate adjustments
and press OK.
8 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available
programmes automatically.
9 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yy
If the TV scans a blocked programme, you
will be prompted to enter your password to
keep the programme scanned.
yy
Use this to automatically find and store all
avail­able programmes. When you start auto
programming, all previously stored service
information will be deleted.
yy
When you select the Cable, the Cable
Service Operator selection screen can differ
or not exist by the Cable situation of the
applicable country.
yy
The popup window to select Service
Operator is only shown initially for the 3
cases when you accessing the Initial
Setting menu, when you change from
Antenna to Cable or when you access the
menu after changing the Country.
yy
When you want to select Service Operator
aside from the above 3 cases, you can do so
by selecting Setup -> Cable DTV Setting ->
Service Operator.
WATCHING TV
yy
Acquired certification SO :
Sweden(Comhem, Canal Digital), Denmark(YouSee, Canal Digital, Stofa), Norway(Canal Digital),
Netherlands(Ziggo, UPC Digitaal),
Ukraine(Volia-Cable), Germany(KDG),
Switzerland(CableCom, UPC),
Austria(UPC Digital), Hungary(UPC Digital), Ireland(UPC Digital), Poland(UPC
Digital), Romania(UPC Digital),
Russia(OnLime).
yy
If there are not any Service Operator
that you want, select Other Operators.
yy
If you select “Other Operators”, or
the selected country supports “Other
Operators” only, it may take some time
to search all the channels, or it may not
search some of the channels.
33
Selecting Satellite,
(Only satellite models)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Auto Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Satellite and press OK.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll make
appropriate adjustments and press OK.
7 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available programmes automatically.
8 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
yy
Programme Type : You can select All
Programmes, FTA Programme or Paid
Programme.
yy
Network Search : You can search through
both an existing Transponder List and the
Transponder List that was transmitted via
NIT.
yy
You can change the Setting ID Info from the
Setting menu.
yy
You can Add/Delete the Setting ID from the
SETUP -> Satellite DTV Setting menu.
yy
If more than 6000 programmes are stored,
you cannot store any more programmes. To
add programmes, delete the unused setting
IDs in SETUP -> Satellite DTV Setting and
tune the TV again.
ENGLISH
ENG
The following values are needed in order to search
all available programmes quickly and correctly.
The commonly used values are provided as "default".
However, for correct settings, please inquire of the
cable service provider.
When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode,
selecting Full will search through all frequencies to
find available channels.
In the case when the programme is not searched
by selecting the Default, perform the searching by
selecting the Full.
However, in the case when the programme is
searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning
time can be taken too much.
• Frequency : Enter a user-defined frequency.
• Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol rate
(Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as
modem sends symbols to a channel).
• Modulation : Enter a user-defined modulation.
(Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals
onto carrier).
• Network ID : Unique identifier allocated for
each user.
• Start Frequency : Enter a user-defined start
frequency range.
• End Frequency : Enter a user-defined end
frequency range.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
34
WATCHING TV
Selecting Antenna & Satellite,
Selecting Cable & Satellite,
(Only satellite models)
(Only satellite models)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Auto Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Antenna & Satellite and press OK.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll make appropriate adjustments and press OK.
7 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available programmes automatically.
8 When you are finished, press EXIT.
ENGLISH
ENG
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
SETUP and press OK.
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Auto Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Cable & Satellite and press OK.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Service Operator and press OK.
7 Press the Navigation buttons to select your
desired cable setting and press OK.
8 Press the Navigation buttons to select your
desired satellite setting and press OK.
9 Select Start to start automatic tuning.
The TV scans and saves available programmes automatically.
10When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
WATCHING TV
35
Cable DTV Setting
Satellite DTV Setting
(In Cable, Cable & Satellite(-Only satellite models)
mode only)
(In Satellite, Antenna & Satellite, Cable & Satellite
mode only-Only satellite models)
The range that a user can select from the Service
Operator menu differs depending on number of
Service Operator supported by each country, and
if number of supported Service Operator for each
country is 1, corresponding function becomes nonactivation.
You can add or delete a satellite setting ID.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Cable
DTV Setting and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Service Operator or Channel Auto update and
press OK.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yy
When Channel Auto Update is On, you can
update information for all the programmes
that can be updated, including the programme currently being watched.
yy
When Channel Auto Update is Off, you can
only update information for the programme
currently being watched.
yy
You can not select the Cable DTV Setting
when the service operator is set to "Ziggo".
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Satellite DTV Setting and press OK.
5 Select your desired setting ID.
You can change the following settings for each
setting ID for your preferences.
Option
Satellite
Description
Select your desired Satellite.
LNB
Frequency
Select one value from Universal, 9750,
10600, 5150.
If you select Universal for LNB Frequency
which is 9750/10600(MHz), 22KHz Tone
is disabled.
If you cannot find the LNB frequency value
from the list, select User and manually
enter the frequency.
22KHz Tone When using 22KHz Tone switch, select A
or B. If you use 22KHz Tone, Tone Burst
and Motorized System are disabled.
Tone Burst When using Tone Burst switch, select A
or B. If you use Tone Burst, 22KHz Tone
and Motorized System are disabled.
LNB Power To enable the power supply for the LNB,
select On.
If you select Off, Motorized System is
disabled.
DiSEqC
When using DiSEqC, select one option
from DiSEqC A~D. If you use DiSEqC,
Motorized System is disabled.
Motorized
When using the motor, select On. To set
System
the antenna position, press OK button
and move the motor. If you use the motor,
22KHz Tone, Tone Burst and DiSEqC
are disabled.
ENGLISH
ENG
6 Select your desired Source.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
36
WATCHING TV
6 If you select Motorized System to On, select
your desired source.
Option
Description
Drive
Select the direction in which you want to
Direction
move the motor.
Drive Mode Two modes are available: Step and Continuous.
yyStep: The motor moves based on the
value you enter (from 1 to 128).
yyContinuous: The motor moves continuously until you press the "Stop".
Test TP
Select the test TP you want to tune.
Set Limit
Go To Zero
Set the motor movement to east or west
to have the motor move only within the
direction set.
yyOn: You can limit the movement to
the current direction by selecting the
"West/East".
yyOff: You can cancel the limit you set.
You can move the motor to "Zero".
Store
You can save the motor's current direction.
Tivu Programme List Update
(In Satellite, Antenna & Satellite, Cable & Satellite
mode only-Only satellite models)(Only Italy)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Tivu
Programme List Update and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Off or
On.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
ENGLISH
ENG
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yy
If you set Satellite to Others when adding a
setting ID, you must add a transponder using
Manual Tuning.
yy
You can add up to 16 setting IDs.
yy
All setting IDs can be deleted, except for
Setting ID 1.
yy
When selecting 22KHz Tone and DiSEqC,
or Tone Burst and DiSEqC, you must connect them in the same position as displayed
on the OSD.
yy
If you delete a setting ID, all programmes
stored in the setting ID are deleted.
NOTE
yy
It updates the changed Programme List information by based on country broadcasting
circumstance and satellite.
yy
It updates the Programme List when the TV
turn off all the time. After updates, the Programme List may be changed. If not want,
select Off.
WATCHING TV
Manually setting up programme
(In digital mode)
Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list.
Selecting Antenna,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to DTV.
6 Scroll through the programme types, and then
add programmes.
37
Selecting Cable,
(In Cable, Cable & Satellite(-Only satellite models)
mode only)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Cable
DTV.
6 Make appropriate adjustments.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
yy
If the TV scans a blocked programme, you
will be prompted to enter your password to
keep the programme scanned.
yy
You can select SBAND when the country is
set to "Norway, Latvia."
NOTE
yy
If the TV scans a blocked programme, you
will be prompted to enter your password to
keep the programme scanned.
yy
Symbol rate : Enter a user-defined symbol
rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device
such as modem sends symbols to a channel).
yy
Modulation : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video
signals onto carrier).
yy
You can not select the Cable DTV when the
service operator is set to "Ziggo" or "Other
Operators" of Netherlands.
ENGLISH
ENG
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
38
WATCHING TV
Selecting Satellite,
(In Satellite, Antenna & Satellite, Cable & Satellite
mode only-Only satellite models)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Satellite DTV.
6 Make appropriate adjustments.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
If the TV scans a blocked programme, you
will be prompted to enter your password to
keep the programme scanned.
yy
Transponder : If there is no transponder to
use, you can add a transponder by logging in
as User.
yy
If more than 2000 transponders are stored,
you cannot add any more transponders. To
add transponders, delete the unused setting
IDs in SETUP -> Satellite DTV Setting and
try again.
yy
If there is no transponder, you cannot use
Auto Tuning. In this case, you must add a
transponder using Manual Tuning.
Manually setting up programme
(In analogue mode)
Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange
the stations in whatever order you desire.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
TV or Cable TV or Cable DTV or Satellite
DTV.
6 Scroll through the programme types, and then
add or delete programmes.
7 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
TV System.
8 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
V/UHF or Cable.
9 Press the Navigation buttons or Number buttons to scroll to the desired channel number.
10Press the Navigation buttons to scroll and start
searching.
11Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Store and press OK.
12When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yy
If the TV scans a blocked programme, you
will be prompted to enter your password to
keep the programme scanned.
yy
L : SECAM L/L’ (France) (Except for DVB-T2
support models)
yyBG : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East
Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa)
yy
I : PAL I (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South
Africa)
yy
DK : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe /
China / Africa / CIS)
yy
To store another channel, repeat steps 6 to 11.
WATCHING TV
Assigning a station name
39
You can assign a station name with five characters
to each programme number.
Fine Tuning
(Except for Satellite models)
Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception
is poor.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
TV or Cable TV.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Name and press OK.
7 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to select
8 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Close and press OK.
9 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Store and press OK.
10When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Manual Tuning and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
TV or Cable TV.
6 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Fine.
7 Fine tune for the best picture and sound.
8 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Store and press OK.
9 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
ENGLISH
ENG
the position and make your choice of the second character, and so on. You can use an the
alphabet A to Z, the number 0 to 9, +/ -, and
blank and press OK.
SETUP and press OK.
40
WATCHING TV
Editing your programme list
Selecting a programme on the programme list
When a programme number is skipped, it means
that you will be unable to select it using P
button during TV viewing.
If you wish to select the skipped programme,
directly enter the programme number with the
NUMBER buttons or select it in the Programme
edit menu.
This function enables you to skip the stored programmes.
1 Press LIST to access the programme list.
Button
Scrolls through programme.
OK
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
P
Red button
TV/RAD
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
FAV
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Programme Edit and press OK.
5 Edit programmes using the following buttons.
ENGLISH
ENG
Button
Description
Highlight the programme type.
Scrolls through programme types or programmes.
Edits programmes.
Selects the highlighted
programme to view.
Registers or cancels the
Set as Facurrent programme in
vourite
favourite programme list.
Selects a programme
Skip
number to be skipped.
Add/Delete
Adds or deletes a programme.
(Only Analogue The deleted programme
mode)
displays in blue.
Move
(Only Analogue Moves a programme.
mode)
Programme
Number Edit Selects your desired programme number.
(Only Digital
mode)
Blocks or unblocks a
Block
programme.
Watch
OK
P
Moves to the previous or next page.
Selects your desired favourite programme
group.
Starts Auto Sort. (Only Analogue mode)
Green button Starts Satellite Programme Sort. (Only
Satellite DTV, Satellite Radio mode)
Red button
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
Description
Selects programme list or recent
programme list.
Selects the highlighted programme
to view.
Moves to the previous or next page.
Edits programmes.
Selects a desired programme mode.
Moves to the favourite programme
list.
2 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
NOTE
yy
If you select the blocked programme, you will
be prompted to enter your password.
WATCHING TV
41
Booster
CI [Common interface] Information
If reception is poor select Booster to On.
When the signal is strong, select Off.
This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI
Module, you cannot watch pay services.
When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you
can access the module menu.
To purchase a module and smart card, contact
your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a
CI module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI
Module, you may not have any sound output.
(Except for Satellite models)
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Booster and press OK.
5 Select On or Off.
This may be incompatible with the CI module and
smart card.
CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting
circumstances.
Add the programmes that you watch frequently to
the favourite list.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Select a programme to add to the favourite list.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
2 Press FAV.
Button
Description
Selects a desired favourite programme
group.
P
Moves to the previous or next page.
Red button
Green button
TV/RAD
FAV
Moves to the Programme Edit.
Register or cancel the current programme.
Selects a desired programme mode.
Moves to the Programme List.
3 When you are finished, press EXIT.
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to CI
Information and press OK.
5 Select the desired item: Module information,
smart card information, language, or software
download etc and press OK.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
yy
This OSD is only for illustration and the
menu options and screen format will vary according to the Digital pay services provider.
yy
It is possible for you to change CI (Common Interface) menu screen and service by
consulting your dealer.
ENGLISH
ENG
Using favourite programmes
When using a CAM(Conditional Access Module),
please make sure it meets fully the requirements
of either DVB-CI or CI plus.
A abnormal process of CAM(Conditional Access
Module) may cause a bad picture.
42
WATCHING TV
Using additional options
- Just Scan: Displays video images in the original size without removing parts of the edge of
the image.
Adjusting aspect ratio
Resize an image to view at its optimal size by
pressing RATIO while you are watching TV.
Just Scan
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
You can also change the image size by
pressing Q. MENU or accessing Aspect
Ratio in the PICTURE menus.
yy
You can adjust the enlarge proportion
using the Navigation buttons.
yy
You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide),
14:9, Cinema Zoom in Component
mode.
yy
You can only select 4:3, Original, 16:9
(Wide), 14:9, Cinema Zoom in HDMI
mode.
yy
You can only select 4:3, 16:9 (Wide) in
RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only.
yy
In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p)
mode, Just Scan is available.
yy
In Analogue/DTV/AV/Scart mode, Full
Wide is available.
NOTE
yy
If you select Just Scan, you may see
image noises at the edge or edges of the
screen.
- Original: When your TV receives a wide
screen signal it will automatically change to the
picture format broadcasted.
Original
- Full Wide: When TV receives the wide
screen signal, it will let you adjust the
picture horizontally or vertically, in a linear
proportion,to fill the entire screen fully.
4:3 and 14:9 video is supported in full screen
without any video distortion through DTV
input.
Full Wide
- 16:9: Resizes images to fit the screen width.
- 4:3: Resizes images to the previous standard
4:3.
WATCHING TV
- 14:9 : You can view a picture format of 14:9
or a general TV programme in the 14:9 mode.
The 14:9 screen is viewed in the same way as
in 4:3, but is moved to the up and down.
43
Changing AV modes
Each AV mode has optimized image and sound
settings.
Press AV MODE repeatedly to select an
appropriate mode.
Off
- Cinema Zoom: Choose Cinema Zoom when
you want to enlarge the picture in correct proportion.
To change the ratio of the cinema zoom,
yy
press < > and its range is from 1 to 16.
To move the zoom focus up or down, press
yy
^ v.
yy
If you enlarge or reduce an image, the
image may be distorted.
Description
Changes to the previously customized
settings.
Cinema or
THX Cinema
Use the optimized image and sound
settings for the cinematic look.
Sport
(Only Plasma
TV)
Game
Use the optimized image and sound settings for dynamic action sports.
Use the optimized image and sound
settings for fast gaming.
When playing a video game using
PlayStation or Xbox, it is recommended
to use the Game mode.
When in Game mode, functions related
to picture quality will be optimized
for playing games.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
Mode
44
WATCHING TV
Using the input list
Selecting an input source
1 Press INPUT to access the input sources.
-The connected device displays on each input
source.
NOTE
yy
You can also access the input source list by
selecting INPUT in the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input sources and press OK.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
yy
Input List
▼
ENGLISH
ENG
Antenna
USB 1
Component1 Component2
Page 1/2
USB 2
NETWORK
AV1
AV2
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
▼
SIMPLINK
Input source
Input Label
Exit
Description
Antenna or
Cable or Satellite
Watch TV over the air, cable, and
digital cable broadcast.
USB
Play media files from a thumb drive.
NETWORK
Play media files from your home network.
AV
Watch video from a VCR or other
external devices.
Component
Watch video from a DVD or other
external devices, or through a digital
set-top box.
RGB
Use the TV as a computer monitor.
HDMI
Watch video from a HTS or other high
definition devices.
The disconnected input sources will be gray.
-To add an input label, press the Green button.
You can easily identify a device connected to
each input source.
-If you connect a new external device to the
TV, a pop-up window appears. Select Yes on
the pop-up window to select an input source.
-To access the SIMPLINK, press the Red
button. If you select “SIMPLINK and On”, the
pop-up window for the HDMI input will not
display.
WATCHING TV
Adding an Input label
Add a label to an input source so that you can
easily identify a device connected to each input
source.
45
Using the Quick menu
Customize frequently used menus.
1 Press Q. MENU to access the Quick menus.
2 Press Navigation buttons to scroll through the
following menus and press OK.
Input Label
▼
Page 1/2
AV1
◄
►
AV2
◄
►
Component1
◄
►
Component2
◄
►
◄
►
Description (Depending on model)
Changes the image size (16:9, Just
Scan, Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9,
Cinema Zoom)
Picture Mode
Changes the image mode (Intelligent
Sensor, Vivid, Standard,
, Cinema
or THX Cinema or THX Bright Room,
Sport, Game, Photo, Expert1, Expert2)
Sound Mode
Changes the sound mode (Standard,
Music, Cinema, Sport, Game)
1 Press INPUT to access the input sources.
Sleep Timer
Sets the length of time until the TV to
turns off.
2 Press Green button.
Subtitle
Language
Audio or
Audio
Language
Audio
Description
Energy Saving
Recalls your preferred subtitle in
digital mode.
Changes the sound output.
RGB
▼
Close
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input sources.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the input labels.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
AV Mode
Skip Off/On
MULTIFEED
(Only satellite
models)
USB Device
Switches the Audio Description On or
Off.
Reduces the power consumption by
adjusting the screen brightness. (Auto,
Intelligent sensor, Off, Minimum, Medium, Maximum, Screen Off)
Sets the optimized image and sound
settings (Off, Cinema or THX Cinema,
Sport, Game)
Sets the Skip Off/On.
Select video from List for a Multifeed
Service.
Eject a USB device.
The menu is displayed only when the
USB device is connected.
NOTE
The available menus and options may
yy
differ from the input source that you are
using.
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to the option
you want.
4 When you are finished, press Q. MENU.
ENGLISH
ENG
Menu
Aspect Ratio
46
ENTERTAINMENT
ENTERTAINMENT
Network Connection
Connecting to a wired network
Connect the TV to a local area network (LAN) via
the LAN port as shown in the following illustration
and set up the network settings.
If wired and wireless networks are both available,
wired is the preferred method.
After making a physical connection, a small
number of home networks may require the TV
network settings to be adjusted. For most home
networks, the TV will connect to automatically
without any adjustments.
For detail information, contact your internet
provider or router manual.
CAUTION
yy
Do not connect a modular phone cable to the
LAN port.
yy
Since there are various connection methods, please follow the specifications of your
telecommunication carrier or internet service
provider.
yy
After connecting the LAN port, use the Premium or LG Apps menu.
To set up the network settings: (Even if your TV
has already connected automatically, running
setup again will not harm anything),
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP
and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
NETWORK and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select Network
ENGLISH
ENG
Setting and press OK.
5 If wired and wireless are simultaneously
connected, press the Navigation buttons to select
Wired and press OK.
6 If you have already set the Network Setting,
select Resetting. The new connection settings
will reset the current network settings.
7 Select IP Auto Setting or IP Manual Setting.
-If selecting IP Manual Setting, press the
Navigation and Number buttons. IP addresses
will need to be input manually.
-IP Auto Setting: Select this if there is a DHCP
server (Router) on the local area network (LAN)
via wired connection, the TV will automatically
be allocated an IP address. If you’re using a
broadband router or broadband modem that
has a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server function. The IP address will
automatically be determined.
-IP Manual Setting: Select if there is no DHCP
server on the network or you want to set the IP
address manually.
8 When you are finished, press EXIT.
ENTERTAINMENT
NOTE
yy
If you want to access the Internet directly
on your TV, the broadband internet connection should always be on.
yy
If you cannot access the Internet,check
the network conditions from a PC on your
network.
yy
When you use Network Setting, check
the LAN cable or check if DHCP in the
router is turned on.
yy
If you do not complete the network settings, the network may not work properly.
47
Connecting to a wireless network
(Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**,
32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**, 50/60PZ75**,
50/60PZ95**)
The LG Wireless LAN for Broadband/DLNA Adaptor,
which is sold separately, allows the TV to connect to a
wireless LAN network.
The network configuration and connection method
may vary depending on the equipment in use and the
network environment. Refer to the setup instructions
supplied with your access point or wireless router for
detailed connection steps and network settings.
Setting up the AP (Access Point) or the wireless router
is required before connecting the TV to the network.
The easiest method is the WPS button method (Third
method in this section).
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
yy
For enjoying pictures, music, or video stored
on a PC using the router, a wired connection
is recommended.
yy
When the wireless port of the router is used,
there may be restrictions on some functions.
yy
It is recommended that an Access Point
(AP) be located more than 1 m away from
the TV. If the AP is installed closer than 1
m, the magic motion remote control may
not perform as expected due to frequency
interference.
48
ENTERTAINMENT
9 Press the Number buttons to Input the security
To set up the network settings,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to NETWORK and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select Network Setting and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to select Wireless and press OK.
6 If you already set Network Setting, select Resetting and press OK.
The new connection settings resets the current
network settings.
7 Press the Navigation buttons to select Setting
ENGLISH
ENG
from the AP list and press OK.
-Scan the all available AP (Access Point) or
wireless routers within range and display
them as a list.
Selecting the wireless network setting type
Select the wireless network setting type.
Setting from the AP list
Simple setting (WPS-button mode)
Setting Ad-hoc network
Next
Exit
Previous
8 Press the Navigation buttons to select an AP
(Access Point) or wireless router on the list. (If
your AP is secured, you will prompted for the
key.) And press OK.
Selecting AP
Select AP you want to connect.
Page 1/1
Input the new SSID
iptime
ASW
Access Point
Searching...
Network1
PIN
Previous
Connect
Exit
key of AP and press OK.
ENTERTAINMENT
When a security code is already
set
PIN (Personal Identification Number)
If your router is set to use a PIN, use the following
instructions.
1 Repeat step 1-7 on “Connecting to a wireless
network”.
2 Press Red button to connect the access point
with PIN mode.
3 You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
Enter the PIN number to your device.
PIN number is the unique 8 digit number of the
dongle.
49
WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup)
If your router or AP has a WPS button, it is the
easiest connection method. You simply press the
button on the router and then select the WPS on
the TV within 120 seconds.
1 Repeat step 1-7 on “Connecting to a wireless
network”.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select the
Simple setting (WPS-button mode).
3 Press the WPS button on your router.
4 Go back to the TV and select Connect.
5 Repeat step 6-7 on “Connecting to a wired
network”.
4 Press OK to select Connect.
Connecting with PIN mode
Insert PIN number at the AP webpage and
press [Connect] button.
Connect
For more information, check the AP manual.
Next
Previous
Exit
5 Repeat step 6-7 on “Connecting to a wired
network”.
ENGLISH
ENG
PIN NUMBER : 12345670
50
ENTERTAINMENT
Ad-hoc Mode
Ad-hoc mode allows the TV to use a wireless to
connect to a computer without using a router or
access point.
1 Repeat step 1-5 on “Connecting to a wireless
5 Press the Navigation buttons to type in an IP
address and press OK.
Option
network”.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select Setting
PC Setting
Ad-hoc network and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to select OK and
press OK.
4 Press OK to select Connect to connect Ad-hoc
network.
-You can see the Network ID and Security Key
on your TV screen.
-Enter this Network ID and Security Key to
your device.
-When needed, you can change the setting
information using the Red button.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
When searching for wireless networks on your
PC using ad-hoc, the TV is named LGTV10.
yyLGTV10 that appears in the list. (Select
the same name as the network ID that appears on your TV screen.)
TV Setting
Description
yy
Internet Protocol(TCP/IP) of PC
needs to be set manually. IP address, Subnet Mask, and default
Gateway can be set with your own
discretion.
»»e.g.) IP address: 192.168.0.1 /
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 /
default Gateway: 192.168.0.10
yy
Verify IP address and gateway of
PC. Input Gateway address of PC
to IP Address, and IP Address of
PC to Gateway, and select OK.
»»e.g.) IP address: 192.168.0.10
/ Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
/ default Gateway: 192.168.0.1
6 Press the Navigation buttons to select Close
after Network setting is completed.
7 Press the OK.
ENTERTAINMENT
Tips for Network setting
yy
The use of a “Router” may not be allowed or its
usage may be limited depending on the policies
and restrictions of your ISP. For details, contact
your ISP directly.
yy
The wireless network operates at 2.4 GHz
radio frequencies that are also used by other
household devices such as cordless telephone,
Bluetooth® devices, microwave oven, and can
be affected by interference from them. It can
be interrupted by the device using 5 Ghz radio
frequencies. It is same device with LG wireless media box, cordless telephone, other Wi-Fi
device.
yy
It may decrease the service speed using Wireless network by surrounding wireless condition.
yy
Turn off all unused network equipment in your
local home network. Some devices may generate network traffic.
yy
In some instances, placing the access point or
wireless router higher up away from the floor
may improve the reception.
yy
The reception quality over wireless depends on
many factors such as type of the access point,
distance between the TV and access point, and
the location of the TV.
yy
To connect wireless AP, an AP that supports the
wireless connection is necessary, and the wireless connection function of the AP needs to be
activated. Please enquire to the AP supplier for
the possibility of AP wireless connections.
yy
Please verify the security settings of AP SSID for
wireless AP connection, and enquire to the AP
supplier for the AP SSID security settings.
yy
The TV can become slower or malfunction with
wrong settings of network equipments (wired/
wireless router, hub, etc). Please install correctly
by referring to the manual of the equipment, and
set the network.
yy
When AP is set to include 802.11 n(Except
for Russia), and if Encryption is designated
as WEP(64/128bit) or WPA(TKIP/AES), the
connection may not be possible. There may be
different connection methods according to the
AP manufacturers.
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
Use a standard LAN cable with this TV. Cat5 or
better with a RJ45 connector.
yy
Many network connection problems during set
up can often be fixed by re-setting the router or
modem. After connecting the player to the home
network, quickly power off and/or disconnect the
power cable of the home network router or cable
modem. Then power on and/or connect the
power cable again.
yy
Depending on the internet service provider
(ISP), the number of devices that can receive
internet service may be limited by the applicable
terms of service. For details, contact your ISP.
yy
LG is not responsible for any malfunction of the
TV and/or the internet connection feature due
to communication errors/malfunctions associated with your broadband internet connection, or
other connected equipment.
yy
LG is not responsible for problems within your
internet connection.
yy
Some content available through the network
connection may not be compatible with the TV. If
you have questions about such content, please
contact the producer of the content.
yy
You may experience undesired results if the
network connection speed does not meet the
requirements of the content being accessed.
yy
Some internet connection operations may not
be possible due to certain restrictions set by the
Internet service provider (ISP) supplying your
broadband Internet connection.
yy
Any fees charged by an ISP including, without
limitation, connection charges are your responsibility.
yy
A 10 Base-T or 100 Base-TX LAN port is required when using a wired connection to this TV.
If your internet service does not allow for such a
connection, you will not be able to connect the
TV.
yy
A DSL modem is required to use DSL service
and a cable modem is required to use cable modem service. Depending on the access method
of and subscriber agreement with your ISP, you
may not be able to use the internet connection
feature contained in this TV or you may be limited to the number of devices you can connect at
the same time. (If your ISP limits sub-scription to
one device, this TV may not be allowed to connect when a PC is already connected.)
51
52
ENTERTAINMENT
Network Status
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to NETWORK and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select Network Status.
5 Press OK to check the network status.
Option
Setting
Description
Return to the network setting menu
or wireless network setting type
menu.
Test
Test the current network status after
setting the network.
Close
Return to the previous menu.
ENGLISH
ENG
ENTERTAINMENT
Premium Account Function
LG’s Premium technology allows you to access a
variety of online services or content directly on your
TV. Your TV offers instant streaming of movies,
weather, videos, and photo album services with a
Premium account and an Internet connection.
Enjoy entertainment including not only entertainment content, but also up-to-the minute news,
weather updates, photo management, and more
by simply using the TV’s remote control without a
separate PC.
1 Press Premium to access the Premium option.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
content you want and press OK.
1
2
3
Sign In
Sat. Jan. 1, 2011 12:00
4
Return
Exit
Movie
Online
Weather Info
Photo Album
Social
Network
Service
News
Sports
Service
Video
Streaming
Map
News
5
6
Search
LG Apps Web Browser Media Link
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
Arrow
Sudoku
My Apps
Description
Moves to the weather setting screen.
Sign into the premium service.
Moves to the previous menu screen.
Returns to TV viewing.
Selects your desired online service.
yyIf a service requires you to log in, you
must first sign up for the service on
your computer and then log into the
service on the TV.
Launcher bar
3 Enjoy the premium features.
Notice
yy
These services are provided by separate
content providers.
yy
Please visit the content providers web site
for specific information on their service.
yy
Premium menu can differ by country.
yyNote that content may be updated automatically depending on the service provider, so
the content layout or operation method may
change without notice. Please refer to the help
menu on the screen.
yyAll information, data, documents, communications, downloads, files, text, images,
photographs, graphics, videos, webcasts,
publications, tools, resources, software, code,
programmes, applets, widgets, applications,
products and other content (“Content”) and all
services and offerings (“Services”) provided
or made available by or through any third
party (each a “Service Provider”) is the sole
responsibility of the Service Provider from
whom it originated.
yy
The availability of and access to Content
and Services furnished by the Service
Provider through the LGE Device are subject
to change at any time, without prior notice,
including, but not limited to the suspension,
removal or cessation of all or any part of the
Content or Services.
yyShould you have any inquiry or problem
related to the Content or Services, you may
refer to the Service Provider’s website for the
most up-to-date information. LGE is neither
responsible nor liable for customer service
related to the Content and Services. Any
question or request for service relating to the
Content or Services should be made directly
to the respective Content and Service Providers.
yy
Please note that LGE is not responsible for
any Content or Services provided by the
Service Provider or any changes to, removal
of, or cessation of such Content or Services and does not warrant or guarantee the
availability of or access to such Content or
Services.
yy
Some content may be harmful to minors
depending on the service provider. Parental
guidance is necessary.
yy
The service may be interrupted if the Internet
connection is unstable. Please check the
connection status if you experience this
problem.
ENGLISH
ENG
UCC
Service
53
54
ENTERTAINMENT
yy
The videos list searched from the TV may
different with the list searched from a web
browser on PC.
yy
The playback of videos may pause, stop, or
buffer depending on your broadband speed.
yy
For service that requires log in, join the applicable service on the website using a PC
and log in through the TV to enjoy various
additional functions.
yy
Only Plasma TV: If there is no user action
2 minutes following freezing image or video
on screen, the screensaver will activate
itself preventing a fixed image remaining on
screen.
Legal Notice
ENGLISH
ENG
IMPORTANT NOTICE RELATING TO NETWORK
SERVICE
All content and services accessible through this
device belong to third parties and are protected by
copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are
provided solely for your personal noncommercial
use. You may not use any content or services in
a manner that has not been authorized by the
content owner or service provider. Without limiting
the foregoing, unless expressly authorized by the
applicable content owner or service provider, you
may not copy, upload, post, transmit, translate,
sell, modify, create derivative works, or distribute
in any manner or medium any content or services
displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE
THAT THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY
CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED "AS
IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LG ELECTRONICS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO ANY
CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS
OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. LG DOES
NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS
OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE OR SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT
OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL LG BE LIABLE,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY OTHER
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR ANY CONTENT OR
SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD
PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended,
removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may
be disabled at any time, without notice, and LG
makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period
of time. Content and services are transmitted by
third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which LG has no control. LG
may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and without
notice or liability. LG expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption,
disabling, removal of or suspension of any content
or service made available through this device.
LG is neither responsible nor liable for customer
service related to the content and services. Any
question or request for service relating to the
content or services should be made directly to the
respective content and service providers.
ENTERTAINMENT
LG Apps Function
Registration LG Apps
Additional applications can be downloaded from
the LG App Store. These functions may be not
available for a certain period of time depending on
country or set. In such cases, the buttons may be
disabled.
They are enabled when the services are available.
New features may be added to this smart TV in the
future.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2
1
Sign In
Sat. Jan. 1, 2011 12:00
HOT
NEW
INPUT
SETUP
Search
LG Apps
5
3
GUIDE
Unit convertor
Puzzle
6
National-flag
Horoscope
4
5
6
7
8
9
Mah-Jong
Sudoku
Winesound
My Apps
8
9
Description
Sign In,
Sign Out
Sign in or sign out to the
premium service.
Exit
Returns to TV viewing.
LG Apps
yy
If you wish to become a paid member or
change your information, please use your PC
and visit http://www.lgappstv.com.
Moves to LG Apps.
Moves to the LG Apps you
want directly.
These functions may be not
Search
available for a certain period of
Web Browser
time depending on country or
set. In such cases, the buttons
may be disabled.
Media Link
They are enabled when the
services are available.
Stores the most frequently
used apps among all downQuick Apps
loads. To change the list of
Quick Apps, see the "Using My
Apps".
Moves to My Apps.
You can browse all apps inMy Apps
stalled, change the list of Quick
Apps, and select and play the
app you want.
ENGLISH
ENG
2
3
7
Arrow
Press the Navigation buttons to select alphabet
and number and select OK.
NOTE
4
Social Network Service
Web Browser Media Link
Option
1
Photo Album
5:05 ~ 5:55
3 Create your ID and password.
3
Weather Info
World Nature
-You can only register as a free member from
your TV.
4 The registration is completed.
UCC Service
Movie Online
2 Press Red button to register.
Exit
LG Apps
Premium
55
56
ENTERTAINMENT
Sign in with your LG Apps account
ID Management
To enjoy your LG Apps with your account, you
need sign in with your LG Apps account.
1 After sign in, press Red button again.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
2 Press Red button to sign in.
A pop-up window will appears.
desired menu option and press OK.
It displays the keyboard menu for entering ID
and password.
-If you are not a member, press Red button
again. You can only register as a free member from your TV.
Account Setting
Change User
Sign Out
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
alphabet or number and press OK.
-If you check “Auto Sign In”, you are automatically logged in whenever you turn on TV.
4 Enjoy LG Apps.
You can enjoy Premium service, LG Apps, My
Apps and much more.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
yy
You can download a paid app on up to
five TVs.
Close
3 Manage the ID by using following menu.
Option
Description
Account
Setting
Check basic information, apps you
purchased and apps installed on
your TV.
Change
User
Changes your account.
Sign Out
Sign out the premium service.
57
ENTERTAINMENT
Using LG Apps
Purchasing and installing Apps.
Log in first to purchase apps.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Press the Navigation buttons to select Apps
2 Sign in on your TV.
you want and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the LG
Apps and press OK.
You can see the information of the App.
2 Press Purchase to buy a App.
4 Edit the Apps by using following menu.
1
LG Apps
7
All
2
Sign In
Game
Entertainment
Colouring
3
Search
4
My Apps
Life
Back
Exit
Tarot
6
Sight Test
National Flag
COLOUR
Fitness
Calendar
5
6
7
8
NEW
TOP
Back
Game
HOT
8
3
� My Apps
Horoscope
News/info
TIE
2
� Sign In
5
Education
Wine Sound Unit Convertor
1
Free
Horoscope is classical game.
Install
Rate this App
4
SUN
Final update date
2011/1/2
Version 1.0
3 Mbyte
Yoga
MahJong
Horoscope
GEMS Quest
0 Ratings
★★★★★
First Aid
ꔍ
PAID
Option
1
6
7
8
Description
1
Sign in or out to use the LG Apps.
Search the LG Apps.
2
3
My Apps
Move to My Apps.
4
Back
Move to the previous screen.
Exit
Exit LG Apps.
yyHOT: Most downloaded apps in
the past 7 days
yyNEW: Most recently released
apps
yyTOP PAID: Most downloaded
Apps Sorting
paid apps
yyTOP FREE: Most downloaded
free apps
yyALL: Alphabetical order
yyMoves to the previous or next
page using P
button.
Shows the LG Apps category
Apps Category (All, Game, Entertainment, Life,
Education, News/info).
Live TV
Watches the current programme.
5
6
7
8
Sign in or out to use the LG Apps.
My Apps
Move to My Apps.
Back
Move to the previous screen.
Shows the description of the current
App description
Apps.
Fee
Shows the fee of the current app.
Install or purchase the App.
You can purchase an app on either
your PC or TV, but it can only be
installed and played on the TV.
yyIf you want to purchase a paid
app, you need to sign up as a paid
member on www.lgappstv.com.
Install
yyIf you don't have enough available
space on your TV, you can download apps to the USB storage
device.
yyYou can play, delete or move the
apps stored on the USB storage
device onto the My Apps screen.
Rate the app you purchased with
Rate this App
stars.
Shows the creator/programme verApp info.
sion/update date/volume/rating of the
current Apps.
NOTE
yyTo store apps in the USB storage device, make
sure that it is connected to the USB Apps USB
IN (Only 32/37/42/47LV37**, 32/37/42/47LV47**,
32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**) or USB IN 2/
USB Apps (Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**,
50/60PZ95**) port.
yyUp to 1000 apps can be stored as USB apps.
yyThe USB storage device containing apps cannot
be used for storing other types of data.
ENGLISH
ENG
2
3
4
5
Option
Sign In,
Sign Out
Search
Description
Sign In,
Sign Out
58
ENTERTAINMENT
Using My Apps
1 Enter the LG Apps after sign in.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the My
Apps and press OK.
4
56
My Apps
7
Sign In
8
Edit
Exit
9
Search
LG Apps
Web Browser
Horoscope
COLOUR
Yoga
Media Link
Arrow
Sudoku
Home
3
2
1
Page 1/1
Option
1
2
3
ENGLISH
ENG
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
Delete
-
Description
Shows the amount of used and available memories.
Current page number/total number of
pages of My Apps.
Shows the downloaded apps.
Moves to the previous or next page using
P
button.
Moves the LG Apps.
Quick Apps.
Sign In the LG Apps.
After sign in, manage the ID option (Account Setting, Change User, Sign Out).
Edit the My Apps.
Exit the My Apps.
Move to the Home menu.
Delete the Apps.
ENTERTAINMENT
Web Browser Function
Using Web Browser
The Web Browser allows you to view Web pages
on your TV.
1 Connect to the network.
Tips for using Web Browser
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
URL and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
desired the URL address and press OK.
Browser Home
URL
Favourites
History
www.lg.com
OK
http://www.lg.com
ENG
Clear similar URL
Back
Exit
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
The web browser on this device supports Flash
8 and earlier.
yy
The web browser on this device does not support platform-dependent technologies such as
ActiveX.
yy
The web browser on this device only supports
preinstalled plug-ins.
yy
The web browser on this device may not support
media formats other than the following
: JPEG / PNG / GIF / WMV (ASF) / WMA / MP3
/ MP4
yy
Some Web pages may exceed the memory allotment of the Web Browser. The Web Browser
will close when this happens.
yy
The web browser on this device uses a single
built-in font. Some text may not be displayed as
intended.
yy
The web browser on this device does not support downloading of files or fonts.
yy
The web browser on this device is a TV browser.
It may work differently to PC browsers.
59
60
ENTERTAINMENT
Browsing Favourite Websites
6 You can browse websites on your TV.
Select the browser input window to display the
keyboard at the bottom of the screen.
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Favourites and press OK.
Menu
1
Button
1
2
3
4
5
ENGLISH
ENG
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
Exit
By adding frequently visited websites to Favourites, you can browse them easily.
7
1
Description
URL
Move to the previous page.
Move to the Favourites screen.
2
3
Browser Home
Favourites
History
1/2 page
4
Zoom the screen in or out.
Add the current web page to Favourites.
Move to the search screen.
Move to the previous/next page in the list of
recently viewed web pages.
You can change the URL address to move to
other websites.
You can delete the list and cookies of recently viewed web pages.
Exit the web browser.
Edit
5
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Back
6
Exit
7
Description
Browse a website by directly entering the URL
address.
Select a website in Favourites.
View the list of recently viewed web pages.
Select a site to browse.
Edit Favourites.
-Move: Change the order in Favourites.
-Rename: Rename the sites added to Favourites.
-Delete: Remove the sites from Favourites.
Move to the previous page.
Exit the web browser.
61
ENTERTAINMENT
Browsing Websites by Directly
Entering Address
Viewing Visited Website List
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Connect to the network.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Web Browser and press OK.
Web Browser and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
History and press OK.
URL and press OK.
You can view the addresses of the websites
you visited previously. Select an item to move
to the page.
You can browse a website by directly entering
the URL address.
1
2
3
URL
4
1
2
URL
Favourites
3
Browser Home
Browser Home
Favourites
History
www.lg.com
OK
>
http://www.lg.com
History
1/2 page
http://www.wingspoon.com/seoul/index.nhn?
4
http://me2day.net/
http://www.naver.com/
http://www.facebook.com/
5
6
7
http://twitter.com/
http://www.paran.com/
ENG
8
Option
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
Back
9
http://kr.yahoo.com/?p=us
http://www.nate.com
Clear History
Exit
5
:
Description
Browse a website by directly entering the
URL address.
Select a website in Favourites.
View the list of recently viewed web pages.
Enter the URL address. If the address entered is similar to any of the sites previously
visited, a drop-down list will be displayed.
Use the keyboard to enter the address. Select characters to enter.
Select the keyboard language.
Change the keyboard.
Clear the similar addresses appearing below
the address input field.
Move to the previous page.
Exit the web browser.
Hide the keyboard. Select the address input
field to display the keyboard again.
Move the cursor left or right.
Delete the text before the cursor, one character at a time.
Press this after entering the address to go to
the website.
Option
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Back
6
Exit
7
Description
Browse a website by directly entering the
URL address.
Select a website in Favourites.
View the list of recently viewed web pages.
Display a list of recently visited pages. Select
an item to move to the page.
Clear the visited website list.
Move to the previous page.
Exit the web browser.
ENGLISH
ENG
Clear similar URL
1
2
3
http://paran.com/
=
<
;
62
ENTERTAINMENT
Smart Share Function
Connecting USB storage devices
Connect USB storage devices such as a USB
flash drive or external hard drive to the TV and use
multimedia features (See "Browsing files").
Connect a USB flash drive or USB memory card
reader to the TV as shown in the following illustration.
or
ENGLISH
ENG
To disconnect a USB storage device, make sure to
end the connection properly to prevent damages
to the TV or files.
1 Press Q.MENU to access the quick menus.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to USB
Device and press OK.
3 Disconnect the USB storage device only when
the message says that it is safe to remove.
CAUTION
yy
Do not turn the TV off or remove a USB storage device while the USB storage device is
connected to the TV, as this could result in
loss of files or damage to the USB storage
device.
yy
Back up your files saved on a USB storage
device frequently, as you may lose or damage the files and this may be not covered by
the warranty.
Tips for using USB storage devices
yy
The TV recognizes only a USB storage
device.
yy
If you connect a USB storage device to the
TV through a USB hub, your TV may not
recognize the USB storage device.
yy
The TV may not recognize a USB storage
device that requires a special driver.
yy
The recognition speed of a USB storage
device may differ depending on the device.
yy
Only use a USB storage device which has
normal music or image files.
yy
Use only USB storage devices that are formatted as a FAT 32 or NTFS file system.
yy
You may need to connect a USB storage
device to an external power supply with a
power adapter.
yy
If the TV does not recognize a connected
USB storage device, replace the cable and
try again. Do not use an excessively long
cable.
yy
The TV does not support some USB storage
devices properly.
yy
You can use a multi-partition (up to 4) USB
storage device.
yy
You can use up to 4 USB storage devices at
a time by using a USB multi-card reader.
yy
The file alignment method of a USB storage
device is similar to the one of Window XP.
yy
You cannot create or delete a folder saved in
a USB storage device directly on the TV.
yy
The number of characters for a file name is
up to 100 English characters.
yy
Up to 1000 including folders and files can be
recognized.
yy
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
yy
The recommended capacity for a USB external hard disk is 1 TB or less and for a USB
storage device is 32 GB or less.
yy
If a USB external hard disk with the Energy
Saving feature does not work, turn the USB
external hard disk off and on again to make
it work properly. For more information, refer
to the user manual of the USB external hard
disk.
yy
USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are
supported as well. But they may not work
properly in the movie list.
yy
The electrostatic can cause USB device’s
malfunction. In this case, USB Device has to
be plugged again.
ENTERTAINMENT
Connecting DLNA DMP (Digital
Living Network Alliance, Digital
Media Player)
NOTE
yy
The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
CD-ROM is a customized software edition
only for sharing files and folders to this TV.
yy
The supplied Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
software does not support following functions: Transcoding, Remote UI, TV control,
Internet services and Apple iTunes
yy
This manual explains operations with the
English version of Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials as examples. Follow the explanation
referring to the actual operations of your
language version.
yy
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
yy
For the DLNA option, use the Nero MediaHome programme that is provided with the
TV. However, we cannot guarantee that third
party programme will work perfectly.
yy
You can select a programme while viewing
the small preview programme list on your TV
screen.
yy
Check your network settings when the DLNA
option does not work properly.
yy
If there is an abnormal operation or an error occurs in Nero Media Home, the DLNA
option may not work properly. In this case,
exit Nero Media Home and restart the
programme. You can download the latest
version of Nero Media Home by clicking
the question mark at the bottom-left of the
programme.
yy
When the network is unstable, the device
may be slower or may need to load during
playback.
yy
When playing a video in DLNA mode, the
Multi Audio and Closed Caption features are
not supported.
yy
When selecting Full Screen in DLNA mode,
the ratio of the outputted screen may differ
from the original.
yy
When more than one TV is connected to
a single server in DLNA mode, a file may
not play properly, depending on the server
performance.
yy
If the play time information is not provided by
the server, it is displayed as "- -."
ENGLISH
ENG
This TV can display and play many types of movie,
photo and music files from your DLNA server and
has been certified by DLNA for movies, photos and
music.
The Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) is a
cross-industry organization of consumer
electronics, computing industry and mobile device
companies. Digital Living provides consumers with
easy sharing of digital media through a wired or
wireless network in the home.
The DLNA certification logo makes it easy to find
products that comply with the DLNA
Interoperability Guidelines. This unit complies with
DLNA Interoperability Guidelines v1.5. When a PC
running DLNA server software or other DLNA
compatible device is connected to this TV, some
setting changes of software or other devices may
be required. Please refer to the operating
instructions for the software or device for more
information.
Please refer to "Smart Share Function" for
additional information on supported file types and
other instructions.
63
64
ENTERTAINMENT
Installing Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials is an easy to use
DLNA server software for Windows.
Computer requirements for Nero MediaHome 4
Essentials
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
Windows® XP (Service Pack 2 or higher),
Windows Vista® (no Service Pack required), Windows® XP Media Center Edition
2005 (Service Pack 2 or higher), Windows
Server® 2003 (Service Pack 1 or higher)
yy
Windows® 7 Home Premium, Professional,
Enterprise or Ultimate(32 and 64-bit)
yy
Windows Vista® 64-bit edition (application
runs in 32-bit mode)
yy
Windows® 7 64-bit edition (application runs
in 32-bit mode)
yy
Hard drive space: 200 MB hard drive space
for a typical installation of Nero MediaHome
stand-alone
yy
1.2 GHz Intel® Pentium® III or AMD Sempron™ 2200+ processors
yy
Memory: 256 MB RAM
yy
Graphics card with at least 32 MB video
memory, minimum resolution of 800 x 600
pixels, and 16-bit colour settings
yy
Windows® Internet Explorer® 6.0 or higher
yy
DirectX® 9.0c revision 30 (August 2006) or
higher
yy
Network environment: 100 Mb Ethernet,
WLAN (IEEE 802.11g), or faster
1 Start up your computer.
2 Close all Microsoft Windows programmes and
exit any anti-virus software that may be running.
3 Insert the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials CDROM into your computer’s CD-ROM drive.
4 Click Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials. The
installation wizard will appear.
5 Click the Next button to display the serial
number input screen. Click Next to go to the
next step.
6 If you accept all conditions, click I accept the
License Conditions check box and click Next.
Installation is not possible without this agreement.
7 Click Typical and click Next. The installation
process is started.
8 If you want to take part in the anonymous collection of data, select the check box and click
the Next button.
9 Click the Exit button to complete the installation.
Sharing files and folders
After installing Nero MediaHome, you must add
folders you wish to share.
1 Double-click the Nero MediaHome 4 Essentials
icon on the desktop.
2 Click Network icon on the left and define your
network name in the Network name field. The
Network name you enter will be recognized by
your TV.
3 Click Shares icon on the left.
4 Click Local Folders tab on the Shared screen.
5 Click Add icon to open the Browse Folder window.
6 Select the folder containing the files you want
to share. The selected folder is added to the
list of shared folders.
7 Click Start Server icon to start the server.
NOTE
yy
If the shared folders or files are not displayed
on the TV, click the folder on the Local Folders tab and click Rescan Folder at the More
button.
yy
Visit http://www.nero.com for more information and software tools.
ENTERTAINMENT
Playing Shared Media
You can display and play movie, photo and music
content stored on your computer or other DLNA
media servers.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to select DLNA.
Depending on the media server, this TV may
need to get the permission from the server.
65
yy
MPO files are not played when Photo List is
in operation.
yy
The playback and operating quality of the
Smart Share function may be affected by
your home network condition.
yy
The files from removable media such as
USB drive, DVD-drive etc. on your media
server may not share properly.
yy
When playing the Media through DLNA connection, it does not support files protected by
DRM.
yy
Up to 1000 including folders and files can be
recognized.
yy
If there are too many folders and files in one
folder, it may not operate properly.
Tips for using DLNA DMP
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
The DLNA function is not available in some
routers which do not support multicasting.
For more information, refer to your router
manual or contact the manufacturer.
yy
To play the file on the media server, the TV
and the media server must be connected to
the same access point.
yy
File requirements and playback functions on
the Smart Share may differ depending on the
media server used.
yy
There may be some restrictions by file
features and the media server that restrict
playback.
yy
Movie thumbnail is only supported when
DLNA server supports a Movie thumbnail.
yy
If there is an unplayable music file in the
Smart Share menu, the TV will skip the file
and play next file.
yy
Files in a folder can be played only when
they are of the same type.
yy
The file information indicated on the screen
may not always correct for music and movie
files in Smart Share menu.
yy
This TV only supports movie subtitle files
supplied by Nero MediaHome 4.
yy
The subtitle file name and movie file name
have to be the same and located in the same
folder.
yy
If subtitle files have been added after a directory has been indexed already, the user has
to remove and re-add the folder to the list of
shares.
yy
The DRM/*.tp/*.trp file in DLNA server is not
played while Movie List is in operation.
66
ENTERTAINMENT
Connecting DLNA DMR (Digital
Living Network Alliance, Digital
Media Render)
This supports remote playing of media files. Media
from a compatible device (Windows 7, Mobile
Phone with PlayTo, or other compatible DLNADMC device) can be "pushed" to the TV.
The DMR function only works properly when the
TV and PC are on the same local network.
1 To play a file, select the file by using the "Re
mote Play" feature in Windows 7.
To do this, right-click on the file you want to
play.
2 You can play a file only on a single TV set or
device even though multiple devices are connected. The playback speed depends on the
network status.
ENGLISH
ENG
File Name
sun
Server Name
MYPC1
Picture display request from an external device.
NOTE
Subtitle is supported only on some DMC
yy
devices.
The DMR function may not work properly
yy
in a wireless network.
yy
The seek function of the DMC only works
on video files.
yy
The DMR is not available when another
function is operating (recording, playback
or Smart Share work etc.).
yy
Refer to the owner’s manual of the mobile phone or other device to find out how
to use it to play a file.
yy
You can change the name of a connected
TV by double-clicking the item you want
to change in Control Panel > Network
and Internet > View network computers
and devices. (Only Windows 7)
yy
You cannot change the name of a TV
while DMR media is playing. Change it
when playback is stopped.
ENTERTAINMENT
Browsing files
Access the photo, music, or movie lists and browse
files.
1 Connect a USB storage device.
2 Press Home to access the Home menu.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press OK.
5 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to All Media,
Movie List, Photo List, or Music List and
press OK.
Type
Supported file format
Video yyMPG, MPEG, DAT, TS, TRP, TP, VOB , MP4,
MOV, MKV, DivX, AVI, ASF, WMV, M4V
yyMax bitrate of playable movie file: 20 Mbps (Mega
bit per second)
yyBit rate of audio format: within 32 kbps to 320
kbps (MP3)
yySupported external subtitle format: *.smi, *.srt,
*.sub (MicroDVD, SubViewer 1.0/2.0), *.ass,
*.ssa, *.txt (TMPlayer), *.psb (PowerDivX)
yySupported Internal subtitle format: only XSUB (It is
the subtitle format made in DivX files), Text UTF-8,
SRT, ASS, SSA (It is the subtitle format used in
DivX-Plus HD files)
File
Item
Extensions
2D
6 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file.
jpeg
jpg
jpe
2
All Media Movie List
Photo List
Music List
Page Change
Page 1/2
3
4
5
No.
Go to root folder
Exit
Go to upper folder
6
Description
Shows all media folders.
Current page number/total number of pages.
Moves to the previous or next page.
Current page number/total number of pages.
Files info or thumbnail.
Available buttons on the remote control.
Thumbnail information
Type
Video
Photo
Music
Abnormal files
Non-supported files
Supported yySOF0:
file format
baseline
yySOF1:
Extend
Sequential
yySOF2:
Progressive
Photo size yyMin:
64 x 64
yyMax - Normal
Type:
15360 (W) x
8640 (H)
yyProgressive
Type:
1920 (W) x
1440 (H)
Drive 1
Change device
Profile
3D
mpo
(Only
3D
models)
Supported yympo
file format
Photo size yy4:3 size:
3,648 x 2,736
2,592 x 1,944
2,048 x 1,536
yy3:2 size:
3,648 x 2,432
Music yyMP3
yyBit rate range 32 Kbps to 320 Kbps
yySampling rate (Sampling Frequency)
MPEG1 layer 3: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
MPEG2 layer 3: 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz
* A copy-protected file will not play.
ENGLISH
ENG
Page 1/1
All Media
USB1 External
Tips for using USB storage devices
Photo yyDo not use the progressive option when saving
JPG files on your PC.
yyIt may take some time to open high-resolution
images in full screen.
- All Media: Shows all files in the file list.
- Movie List, Photo List, or Music List:
Shows only one type of file in the file list.
1
67
68
ENTERTAINMENT
Viewing Videos
7 Control playback by using the following
buttons.
Play video files on the TV. Your TV can display
video files from a USB storage device.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press OK.
01:02:30 / 02:30:25
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Movie
Chapter
Option
Hide
Exit
List and press OK.
5 Press Navigation buttons to select a folder or
file you want and press OK.
Button
Stops the playback.
6 Play a movie by using the following menus/but-
Plays a video.
tons.
Pauses or resumes the playback.
Page 1/1
Movie List
USB2 External
Drive1
ENGLISH
ENG
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
Button
Navigation
button
OK
P
Go to upper folder
and
Red button
and
Exit
Description
Scrolls through the files.
Plays the highlighted file.
Moves to the previous or next page.
Change device: Changes to a different input.
Green button Go to root folder.
Yellow button Go to upper folder.
Red button
Scans forward in a file.
Page 1/2
M2
Go to root folder
Scans backward in a file.
Page Change
M1
Change device
Description
ENERGY
SAVING
3D
(Only 3D
models)
Plays videos in slow motion.
Selects the frame directly.
The entire file is divided into 10 frames.
Frames may not be displayed depending
on the file.
Increases or decreases the brightness
of your screen.
Views the 3D imaging.
Q.MENU
Shows the Option menu (See p.70).
AV MODE
Select the desired source.
BACK
EXIT
Hides the menu on screen.
To see the menu again, press OK button to display.
Moves to the previous menu screen.
ENTERTAINMENT
Tips for playing video files
yy
The TV may not play the video files in the
supported file format depending on the encoded condition.
yy
Trick Mode does not support other functions than ꕙ if video files do not have index
information.
yy
Video file names that contain special characters may not be playable.
yy
For 3D WMV files encoded in dualstream,
3D mode is not supported. (Only 3D models)
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
The TV does not support the files encoded in
Motion JPEG. (See p.142)
yy
Some user-created subtitles may not work
properly.
yy
Subtitles may not display some special characters or HTML tags.
yy
Changing font and colour in subtitles is not
supported.
yy
Subtitles in non-supported languages are
unavailable.
yy
Video files with subtitle files of 1 MB or larger
may not be played properly.
yy
The screen may suffer from temporary
interruptions such as image stoppage or
faster playback when you change the audio
language.
yy
If you play a damaged video file, the video
file may not be played correctly or some
player functions may not be unavailable.
yy
The TV may not properly play the video files
produced with certain encoders.
yy
If the recorded file does not have video or
audio, either video or audio is not outputted.
yy
If the TV plays the recorded file without video
or audio, either video or audio is not outputted.
yy
The TV may not smoothly play the video files
with a resolution higher than the supported
resolution for each frame.
yy
The TV may not properly play the video
files not included on the specified type and
format.
yy
The TV may not play the files encoded with
GMC (Global Motion Compensation) or
quarter-pel motion estimation.
yy
The TV supports the only 10,000 sync blocks
within the subtitle file.
yy
The TV supports the H.264/AVC codec up to
the profile level 4.1.
yy
The TV does not support DTS audio codec.
yy
The TV cannot play a video file whose size is
larger than 30 GB.
yy
If you play a video file through the USB connection that does not support the high speed,
the video player may not work properly.
yy
The video file and its subtitle should be in the
same folder and the name of the video file
and subtitle should be identical.
69
70
ENTERTAINMENT
Q.MENU options for movie list
1 Press Q.MENU.
A pop-up window will appears.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press OK.
Set Video Play.
Option
Description
ENGLISH
ENG
Selects your desired picture format for
videos.
yyFull Mode: Files are played in
Picture
full screen mode according to the
Size
aspect ratio of video.
yyOriginal Mode: Files are played in
their native size.
Changes the Language Group of the
Audio
audio for video files. Files with a single
Language
audio track cannot be selected.
Subtitle
The subtitles can be turned on or off.
Language
Activated for SMI subtitles and can
Language
select the language within the subtitle.
Subtitle font selection. When set to
default, contents are displayed in the
language set in "Option - Language Menu Language".
Option
Description
Code
Page
Subtitle
yyLatin1 : English,
Spanish, French,
Language
German, Italian,
Group
Swedish, Finnish,
Dutch, Portuguese,
Danish, Romanian,
Norwegian, Albanian,
Gaelic, Welsh, Irish,
Catalan,Valencian
yyLatin2 : Bosnian,
Polish, Croatian,
Czech, Slovak,
Slovenian, Serbian,
Hungarian
yyLatin4 : Estonian,
Latvian, Lithuanian
yyCyrillic : Bulgarian,
Macedonian, Russian,
Ukrainian, Kazakh
yyGreek : Greek
yyTurkish : Turkish
Sync
If the video is not synchronized with the captions,
it can be adjusted by 0.5
second.
Position
Move the location of the
subtitles.
Size
Repeat
Changes the subtitle font
size.
Turn on/off repeat function of movie
playback. When turned on, the file
within the folder will be played back
repeatedly. When turned off, if the next
file name is similar to the previous file,
it can be played sequentially.
NOTE
yy
Option values changed in Movie List
does not affect Photo List and Music List.
yy
Option value changed in Photo List and
Music List are changed likewise in Photo
List and Music List excluding Movie List.
yy
When replaying a video file after stopping, select “Yes” to restart where it previously stopped.
yy
If continuous series files exist within the
folder, the next file will automatically be
played. But, this excludes cases when
the Repeat function of Movie List Option
is turned “On”.
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video presets. (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings”)
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio presets. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings”)
Set DivX PLUS HD
These options are enabled only when the movie
file being played contains the title, edition and
authored chapter information.
Option
Title
Edition
Authored
Chapter
Description
For files with more than one title,
select the title you want to play.
For files with more than one edition,
select the edition you want to play.
yyAn edition refers to the playback
order set based on the chapters.
Select and play the chapter you
want.
ENTERTAINMENT
DivX® VOD Guide
DivX® VOD Registration
In order to play purchased or rented DivX® VOD
contents, you should register your device with 10
digit DivX registration code from your device at
www.divx.com/vod.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share Setting and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to DivX
VOD Registration and press OK.
6 View the registration code of your TV.
You must register your device to
play DivX protected videos.
Registration code : xxxxxxxxxx
Register at http://vod.divx.com
Close
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
yy
While you are checking the registration code,
some buttons may not work.
yy
If you use the DivX registration code of
another device, you cannot play the rented
or purchased DivX file. Make sure to use the
DivX registration code assigned to your TV.
yy
The video or audio files that are not
converted by the standard DivX codec may
be corrupted or not be played.
yy
The DivX VOD code allows you to activate
up to 6 devices under one account.
DivX® VOD Deregistration
You should deregister your device with 8 digit DivX
deregistration code from your device at
www.divx.com/vod.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share Setting and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to DivX
Deregistration and press OK.
6 Select Yes to confirm.
Deregistration code:
********
Deregister at http://vod.divx.com
Continue with registration?
i
Yes
No
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
NOTE
Once the deregistration is executed, you
yy
must register your device again to see DivX®
VOD contents.
ENGLISH
ENG
i
71
72
ENTERTAINMENT
7 The following options are available while
Viewing Photos
viewing photos.
You can view image files saved on a USB storage
device. The displays on the screen may based on
the from the model.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
yy
01_a.jpg
2008/12/10
1920 x 1080
479 KB
[1/66]
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press OK.
Slideshow
BGM
Option
Hide
Exit
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Photo
List and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to a
folder/file you want and press OK.
6 View photos by using the following menus/buttons.
Page 1/1
Photo List
ENGLISH
ENG
USB2 External
Page Change
Drive1
Page 1/2
P1
P2
P3
P4
P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
Change device
Go to root folder
Go to upper folder
Option
Slideshow
BGM
Turns the background music on or off.
(Background To set the background music folder,
Music)
select Option.
Displays the current photo in Original,
(Colour Filter) Monotone, Sepia, Oil Painting and
(Only Plasma TV) Vignetting.
Rotates photos clockwise (90°, 180°,
270°, 360°).
NOTE
Exit
(Rotate)
Button
Navigation
button
OK
P
Red button
Description
Starts or stops a slideshow.
All photos saved in the current folder
display during a slideshow.
To set a slideshow speed, select Option.
Views the photo in full mode or original
mode.
Description
Scrolls the file.
Views the highlighted file.
Moves to the previous or next page.
Change device: Changes to a different input.
yyThe supported photo size is
limited. You cannot rotate a
photo if the resolution of the
rotated width is larger than the
supported resolution size.
(ENERGY
SAVING)
3D
(Only 3D
models)
Option
Increases or decreases the brightness
of your screen.
Views the 3D images.
Shows the Option menu. (See p.73)
Green button Go to root folder.
Hide
Hides the option window.
To display the options, press OK.
Yellow button Go to upper folder.
Exit
Moves to the previous menu screen.
ENTERTAINMENT
73
Q.MENU options for photo list
1 Press Q. MENU.
A pop-up window will appears.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the following options and press OK.
Set Photo View.
Option
Description
Selects a slideshow speed (Fast, MeSlide Speed
dium, Slow).
Selects a music folder for the background music.
Select Repeat or Random option.
BGM
NOTE
yyYou cannot change the music
folder while the background
music is playing.
yy
Option values changed in Photo List do not
affect Movie List and Music List.
yy
Option values changed in Photo List or
Music List are changed likewise in Photo List
and Music List, but not Movie List.
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video settings. (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings”)
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings”)
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
74
ENTERTAINMENT
Listening to music
7 Control playback by using the following buttons.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Smart
Share and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
device you want and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Music
Page 1/1
Music List
USB2 External
M1
M2
Page Change
M3
Page 1/2
001. - B01.mp3
002. - B02.mp3
003. - B03.mp3
004. - B04.mp3
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
005. - B05.mp3
006. - B06.mp3
007. - B07.mp3
008. - B08.mp3
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
009. - B09.mp3
010. - B10.mp3
011. - B011.mp3
012. - B012.mp3
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
013. - B13.mp3
014. - B014.mp3
015. - B15.mp3
016. - B016.mp3
00:00
00:00
00:00
00:00
001. - B01.mp3 �
00:03 / 02:58
Option
List and press OK.
Hide
Exit
5 Press the Navigation buttons to select a folder
or file you want and press OK.
6 Play music by using the following menus/buttons.
Button
Description
Stops playback.
Plays a music file.
Page 1/1
Music List
USB2 External
Drive1
ENGLISH
ENG
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M7
M8
M9
M10
M11
M12
M13
M14
M15
M16
Button
Navigation
button
OK
Go to root folder
Pauses or resumes playback.
Page 1/2
M1
Change device
P
Page Change
Go to upper folder
Skips to the previous file.
Skips to the next file.
Indicates a cursor.
(ENERGY
SAVING)
Exit
Description
Scrolls through the files.
Q.MENU
BACK
EXIT
Increases or decreases the brightness
of your screen.
Shows the Option menu. (See p.75)
Hides the option window.
To display the options, press OK.
Moves to the previous menu screen.
Plays the highlighted file.
Moves to the previous or next page.
Change device: Changes to a differRed button
ent input.
Green button Go to root folder.
Yellow button Go to upper folder.
Open music player.
Blue button
It is enabled during playing music.
Tips for playing music files
yyThis unit cannot support the ID3 Tag embedded
MP3 files.
ENTERTAINMENT
Q.MENU options for music list
1 Press Q. MENU.
A pop-up window will appears.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
option and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
75
Set Audio Play.
Select Repeat or Random option.
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings”)
the following options and press OK.
NOTE
yy
Option values changed in Movie List does
not affect the Photo List and Music List.
yy
Option value changed in Photo List and
Music List are changed likewise in Photo List
and Music List.
NOTE
yy
The TV will not play copy protected files.
yy
If the TV is not in use for some time during
playback, the information box as a screensaver will appear to prevent image burn.
To return to the Music list screen, press OK.
File name
002. B02.mp3
00:31 / 04:04
ENGLISH
ENG
Time elapsed /Duration
76
ENTERTAINMENT
Media Link Function
Media Link Connection
The Media Link programme allows you to
connect to a Plex Media Server. The Plex Media
Server is free download from www.plexapp.com.
It will allow to play media files and download Plex
apps. The Plex apps download to your computer
and do not use any space on the TV.
1 Your TV must be connected to your home net-
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
We recommend that you install version
0.9.1.14 or later of PLEX Media Server on
your Mac or PC. (Download the installation
file at http://www.plexapp.com/medialink)
yy
GUI is displayed in English and the data
transmitted will not be displayed when using
the following languages: Thai, Arabic, Persian, Hebrew, Kurdish.
yy
When using the video plug-in, initial buffering
may take a while if the TV does not support
a file to be played and conversion needs to
be performed on the computer. The conversion performance may vary depending on
the computer's performance and the network
speed.
yy
When playing the files stored on the computer (movies, TV shows, music), the formats
supported are the same as those for the
DLNA function. The skip to content function
is not supported when playing music. (Same
for DLNA)
yy
You may experience problems when playing
HD movies over Wi-Fi due to the network
slowing down.
yy
When using a router, the TV may not detect
the computer due to the router settings. (For
example, when using the multicast forward
function in some routers, TVs cannot detect
computers via Wi-Fi.)
yy
Some plug-ins may not work, depending on
the media format.
yy
Plug-ins are subject to change and may stop
working without prior notice, at the providers’
discretion.
work. Either using a wired or wireless connection. (See p.46 to 52).
2 You can download PLEX at http://www.plexapp.com/medialink.
- For more information on how to install it,
please visit the website above.
3 When you run PLEX for the first time, the wiz-
ard guides you through the steps to set up the
programme.
- For information on how to use the wizard,
please visit the website above.
77
ENTERTAINMENT
Using Media Link
Viewing Movies
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
Media Link will retrieve information on shared
movies as described below.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press OK.
3 The Media Link sections of the connected computer are displayed. Select an icon to view the
shared media in that category.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link
Video and press OK.
M's PC
Media Link
1
M's PC
2
Movies
M's PC
Sort by server
3
Music
M's PC
TV show
M's PC
Device Selection
4
Video
Plug-i...
Music
Plug-i...
PLEX Online
5
Back
6
Picture
Plug-i...
1
Exit
7
2
Description
1
This is a list of categories you set on the connected computer.
2
This is a list of plug-ins for online content.
Option
3
Change the section sorting.
- By server name: Sort the list by server
name.
- By item name: Sort the list by item name.
1
2
3
4
Select another device.
4
5
Using PLEX Online, you can install, remove
or update applications on the computer.
5
Move to the previous page.
Exit Media Link.
Search
3
6
7
Filter
4
Back
5
6
Exit
7
Description
Show information for the selected movie.
Show images captured from the movie file.
Search movies within the section.
Display the list according to the selected
filter.
Select to play the movie in full screen mode.
If the movie has already been played, you
can continue from the last scene.
Move to the previous page.
Exit Media Link.
ENGLISH
ENG
Option
6
7
Movies
78
ENTERTAINMENT
Using Music Section
Using TV Programme Section
You can view information for the music files set for
the Music section and enjoy them.
You can view information for the programmes contained in the TV Show section and enjoy them.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press OK.
Media Link and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Music section and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the TV
Show section and press OK.
Media Link
M's PC
Music
1
2
M's PC
TV Show > TV Sitcom > Season 2
3 1
3
2
Search
4
Filter
5
Back
6
Exit
Search
7
ENGLISH
ENG
4
Option
Description
1
Sort the music files in the selected section in
the order of artist > album > song title.
Option
Select a folder or a song.
Show the artist, album and information for the
selected music.
Search music files within the section.
Display the list according to the selected
filter.
Move to the previous page.
1
Exit Media Link.
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
Filter
5
Back
6
Exit
7
Description
Sort the TV programme files in the selected
section in the order of programme name >
season > episode.
Select a folder or a programme.
Show information for the selected programme.
Search TV programmes within the section.
Display the list according to the selected
filter.
Move to the previous page.
Exit Media Link.
ENTERTAINMENT
79
Installing Plug-Ins
Media Link allows you to install plug-ins to enjoy
media content on the web.
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the
Media Link and press OK.
3 Press yellow button to select to PLEX online.
M's PC
Movie Plug-ins
1
2
Back
3
Option
2
3
4
4
Description
Move the cursor to a plug-in to view the plugin information on the right pane.
Plug-ins already installed: You can run,
update, reinstall or remove them.
Plug-ins not yet installed: You can install
them.
Once installed, you can run the plug-in by
selecting Video, Music or Picture Plug-in from
the Media Link main screen.
A list of plug-ins available for installation.
Move to the previous page.
Exit Media Link.
ENGLISH
ENG
1
Exit
80
DVR Function
DVR Function
(This function is available for limited models in
select countries. DVR-ready models have REC
button on the remote control.)
Precautions when using the
USB Device
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
Only a USB storage device is recognizable.
yy
If the USB storage device is connected
yy
through a USB hub, the device is not
recognizable.
A USB storage device using an automatic
yy
recognition programme may not be
recognized.
A USB storage device which uses its own
yy
driver may not be recognized.
In case of several partitions or a card reader,
yy
up to four memory cards are concurrently
recognizable.
The recognition speed of a USB storage
yy
device may depend on each device.
Please do not turn off the TV or unplug
yy
the USB device when the connected USB
storage device is working. When such device
is suddenly separated or unplugged, the
stored files or the USB storage device may
be damaged.
Please connect power to a USB storage
yy
device which requires an external power
supply. If not, the device may not be
recognized.
Please connect a USB storage device with
yy
cable is offered by USB maker. If connected
with cable is not offered by USB maker or an
excessively long cable, the device may not
be recognized.
Some USB storage devices may not be
yy
supported or operate properly.
The TV will display up to 128 characters of a
yy
files name.
Please backup important files because data
yy
on USB device may be damaged. Data
management is consumer’s responsibility
and as a result, the manufacturer does not
cover data damage.
The recommended capacity is 40 GB or over
yy
and 1TB or less for a USB HDD.
Any device with more than the recommended
yy
capacity may not work properly.
Playing a movie via a USB connection that
yy
doesn’t support high speed may not work
properly.
USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are
yy
supported as well. But they may not work
properly in the movie list.
Please maintain the stability of external HDD
yy
by using the HDD benchmarking tool in order
to guarantee smooth action of HDD.
The HDD benchmarking tools is checking the
yy
performance of HDD that is read/write rate,
access time, stability. It will be able to search
at website and use easily it after download
the HDD benchmarking tool.
DVR USB hard disk supports only SSD
yy
or HDD disk types. (USB memory is not
supported.)
A SSD (Solid State Drive) has a limited
yy
number of write/delete cycles. A HDD (Hard
Disk Drive) is recommended for this product.
DVR Function
Timeshift (PAUSE & REPLAY OF
LIVE TV)
This function allows the unit to automatically
record live TV and make it available for viewing at
any time.
With the Timeshift turned on, you may pause and
rewind normal TV viewing at any time without
missing any of the live broadcast.
Timeshift and Recording functions may not work if
the signal strength is weak.
This function is only operated after initializating
USB Device.
81
USB device Initialization
!
To use LG DVR feature, USB storage
device needs to be formatted.
Do you want to continue?
OK
!
Cancel
Initializing will delete all existing data
in the USB device. Once initialized to
DVR format, the USB device cannot
be used with PC. To continue to initialize, select OK.
OK
Connecting USB storage devices
i
Cancel
Initialization completed. Ready to
record.
Timeshift Mode
◄
On ►
Close
press REC to initialize the USB device.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to OK
and press OK.
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to On or Off
1 Connect the USB device to the USB IN 1/HDD
and press OK.
IN jacks on the side of TV.
2 To use the USB device (over 40 GB) for DVR,
execute USB Device Initialization.
NOTE
yy
It initializes the HDD connected to the USB
as disk mode for DVR.
yy
It is activated only when the USB HDD available for DVR is connected.
yy
When USB Device Initialization is executed,
all the data stored in the USB device is
deleted.
yy
While performing USB Device Initialization,
do not remove the USB device. It may cause
error on the TV and the storage device.
NOTE
yy
When initialization is completed, a popup
notice of completion is displayed and the
connected USB HDD is available for DVR.
yy
Depending on the capacity of the USB device, the initialization time may vary.
yy
The initialized USB device is not recognized
by the PC.
yy
When a USB device of less than 40 GB is
connected, the USB Device Initialization is
not activated.
yy
Supported maximum external HDD size for
back-up is up to 1TB.
ENGLISH
ENG
1 Connect an unformatted USB for DVR and
82
DVR Function
Timeshift Mode change during using DVR
Timeshift Mode
Record/Schedule
◄
On
Schedule list Initialization
USB Device Reinitialization during using DVR
► Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
Apr.2 2010 15:30
You can see the recorded TV.
USB device Initialization
Recorded List
Schedule List
Close
� Recording starts.
Select schedule
by date
Select schedule
by programme
Option
Recording starts
Exit
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button to show the DVR option
menu and press Q.MENU.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Timeshift Mode and press OK.
4 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to On or Off
and press OK.
ENGLISH
ENG
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
Menu
Recorded List
Description
Moves to the Recorded List.
Schedule List
Moves to the Schedule List.
Select schedule by Moves to the Manual Timer.
date
Select schedule by Set up timer recording by going
to the Programme Guide.
programme
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button to show the DVR option
menu and press Q.MENU.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to USB
device Initialization and press OK.
4 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
DVR Function
NOTE
Timeshift Progress
�
2
��
1
3
00:35
05:35
ꔄ Recording starts � Live TV � � ꕚ ꕙ � Recorded List � Rec./Schedule
� Hide
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
- As soon as Timeshift starts, a progress bar
indicating the current recording status is
displayed in the bottom of the screen.
- It Press the BACK button to hide the ‘Progress
Bar’ or press the OK button to display the
‘Progress Bar’.
- This function is preserved even though
changing a programme on progressing the
Timeshift.
This function indicates what Timeshift
reviewing is possible, a current on-screen
and live broadcasting position.
1
Preview
2
Current location and progress time in
playback
3
Total progress time of the Timeshift
yy
In order to save hard-disk space, nothing is
saved when there is no signal.
yy
Timeshift can be used for maximum of 2
hours.
yy
You can’t do the programme change or input
conversion on recording.
yy
When turning power on, it may take up to a
maximum of 3 minutes to initialize the HDD.
yy
Recording or playing the recorded programme may not initiate for a copy-protected
programme.
yy
Instant recording time is set to 3 hours and
supported maximum time is up to 5 hours.
yy
A thumbnail is created every 3 minutes for
recordings longer than 18 minutes and every
1 to 3 minutes for recordings shorter than 18
minutes.
yy
Up to 6 thumbnails are created on one
screen.
yy
DVR is available in DTV channel.
yy
Radio or satellite programmes or some
scramble programmes cannot be recorded.
yy
You can record and enjoy DTV programmes
in 3D.
ENGLISH
ENG
The ‘Progress Bar’?
Playback
Fast forward
Rewind
Pause
Direct view +
Direct view By one screen
Slow playback
83
84
DVR Function
Playback during the Timeshift
During the Timeshift play, the following options
are available.
Recording
Use this function when you cannot watch the desired programme due to being out.
Start/Stop record
Use of remote control
You can playback the temporarily saved part in
various methods during the Timeshift.
You can record the programme you are watching.
Start record
Button
ENGLISH
ENG
, OK
LIVE TV
Description
During playback,
repeatedly, press the REW ( ) or FF
( ) button to speed up.
time you press the button, the
- Every
search speed will increase by stage
(up to 4 stages).
During playback, press the Pause( )
button.
screen is displayed.
- Pause
time you press the Pause( )
- Every
button from the pause screen, it will
move screen by screen ( ).
the Pause( ) button and then
- Press
use the FF ( ) button for slow motion
( ).
When you move the cursor using
the Navigation ( ) button during
playback, and then press the OK
button, the screen will directly play
at the applicable screen where the
cursor is located. (
)
To view the current live broadcast,
press the LIVE TV button during
playback.
1 Press REC to start the recording.
Stop record
Recording in progress. Stop
recording?
!
Recording stop
Recording end time modify
Close
� Recording starts.
1 Press REC to stop the recording.
2 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to Recording
stop and press OK.
NOTE
yy
You can also stop the recording by
pressing STOP ( ).
85
DVR Function
Schedule
Modify recording end time
!
Recording in progress. Stop
recording?
Manual Timer
Recording stop
Recording end time modify
This function is easy to register to reserved recording. Timer recording is set.
Close
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
Record/Schedule
Apr.2 2010 15:30
Going to the manual timer menu.
Select time to record.
Start Time
10
:
37
End Time
13
:
37
Recorded List
Recording starts
OK
Select schedule
by programme
Select schedule
by date
Schedule List
Exit
Option
Cancel
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
Manual Timer
2 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to Recording
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to set the
recording end time and press OK.
Sun.
Mon.
Tue.
Wed.
Thu.
Fri.
28
29
30
31
1
22
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
NOTE
yy
When recording, if the available storage
space is not sufficient, the recording will
automatically Stop.
yy
Recordings of less than 10 seconds will not
be saved.
yy
Recording available time is maximum 5
hours.
yy
To save disk space while recording broadcasts, no data will be saved if there is no
signal.
yy
The recording function will not initiate for a
copy-protected programme.
yy
The displayed time may differ slightly from
the actual time.
yy
When there is no signal or a film source is
being viewed, the displayed time may differ
slightly from the actual time.
WARNING
yy
Broadcast materials are protected by copyright and that recording and playback of
certain material would only be permissible by
permission of the copyright owner.
yy
Audio and video recordings you make using
this recorder are for your personal use only.
You may not sell, lend or rent them to other
people.
Sat.
Once
ꔡ
10
Weekly
(Fri.)
Mon. ~ Fri.
No schedule list
17
Cancel
24
Move
Programme Guide
Apr.2 2010ꔉ
3
Daily
OK
Schedule List
Exit
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button.
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to Select
schedule by date and press OK.
4 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to select a
date and press OK.
5 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to select
repeat option and press OK.
6 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to set the
schedule type, time and programme and press
OK.
7 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
ENGLISH
ENG
end time modify and press OK.
Apr.2 2010 15:30
Select the date to schedule.
1 Press REC on the recording.
86
DVR Function
Schedule List
Menu
This function is used to show scheduled programme.
You can store up to 30 programmes.
Delete
Delete all items in the list.
Close the pop-up menu.
Exit
Option
Recording starts
Close
Select schedule
by programme
Select schedule
by date
Schedule List
Delete the selected item in the list.
Delete All
Apr.2 2010 15:30
You can see the schedule list.
Recorded List
Modify
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
Record/Schedule
Description
Edit the contents of Start date/
Start time/End time/Title/Repeat.
You must press the BACK button
to save the edited contents.
This feature is disabled in reserved
reminding.
Schedule List Initialzation
This function is to reset the schedule list.
Schedule List
Apr.2 2007 15:30
Page1/1
Start Date
Start Time
16:00
6 May
18:00
Timeshift Mode
Friend2
16:00
Friend1
◄
On
►
Schedule list Initialization
Friend2
Modify
Modify
USB device Initialization
►
6 May
Title
Delete
ENGLISH
ENG
Delete All
Remind
DTV 19 Dave
(Fri.)06/05/2007
16:00
ꔀ
Manual Timer
Close
� Recording starts.
Close
Move
Modify/Delete
Programme Guide
Exit
!
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button.
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to Schedule
List and press OK.
4
Press Navigation buttons to select a desired
programme and press OK.
5
When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
The schedule list is deleted after
initialization. To continue
initialization, select OK.
Cancel
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button to show the DVR option
menu and press Q.MENU.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
Schedule list Initialization and press OK.
4 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to OK and
press OK. Start the Schedule List Initialization.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
DVR Function
Programme Guide
NOTE
This function is easy to register to reserved recording.
(Refer to “EPG”).
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
Record/Schedule
Apr.2 2010 15:30
Going to the manual timer menu.
Recorded List
Schedule List
Select schedule
by date
Recording starts
Select schedule
by programme
Exit
Option
Programme Guide
▲
That ’70s show
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
ALL
NOW
1 YLE TV1
NEXT
5 YLE FST Naturtimmen
Lyssna
6 CNN
Keno
World Business
Fantomen
Kritiskt
ABC
▼
Mode
Watch/Schedule
TV/
RAD
Manual Timer
RADIO
Schedule List
Exit
FAV
Favourite
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Yellow button.
3 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to Select
schedule by programme and press OK.
4 Press Navigation buttons to scroll to select a
programme and press OK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
yy
Recording is not possible with copy-protected programmes.
Programme with copy protection : failed to record.
yy
When a poor quality external source is
recorded the quality of the recording will not
be optimal.
yy
Manual Recording available time is maximum 5 hours and minimum 2 minutes.
yy
When broadcasting station send the wrong
time information, reserved recording may be
failed.
yy
If different programmes are set for the same
time for on time and reserved recording, this
TV is powered on to the reserved recording
programme.
yy
If you turn off the power during the recording, the programme being recorded may not
be saved. Therefore it is good to press the
STOP ( ) button and check the reserved/recorded list, and then turn off the power.
yy
Recording cannot be reserved for a period
less than 10 seconds.
yy
Because the title and time of the programme
for Record/Remind is based on the information transmitted from the broadcasting
station, they may be different than the actual
ones depending on the situation of the
broadcasting station.
yy
Recording time may differ depending on
resolution of input signal or USB HDD capacity.
yy
When it is time for the reserved recording
to start and the power of the TV is turned
off, the TV will turn on the power of the part
required for the recording and proceed to the
reservation.
yy
When it is time for the reserved recording
to start and the Immediate recording is in
progress, the recording of the programme
currently being recorded will be stopped and
saved, and then proceed to the reserved
recording.
yy
If the TV is unplugged once or turn off, the
reserved recording will not work.
ENGLISH
ENG
That ’70s show
2 YLE TV2 Your World Today
4 TV..
Legenen om Den....
INFO i Information
87
88
DVR Function
Recorded TV
NOTE
You can view the recorded programme list at a
glance.
The recorded programme stored in the USB
device can be played.
Recorded TV List
�
��
00:35
05:35
ꔄ Recording starts � Live TV � � ꕚ ꕙ � Recorded List � Rec./Schedule
Recorded List
USB
USB1 XTICK
Play
� Hide
Page Change
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
1/1 Page
D1
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
D2
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
D3
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
ENGLISH
ENG
Mark Mode
Exit
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Green button to select Recorded List.
3 Press Navigation buttons to recorded
programme and press OK.
4 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
yy
If there is a bad sector in the disk, part or
all of the items of the Recording list can be
deleted.
yy
Maximum number of recordings within the
Recording list is 200. When the number of
recordings in the Recording list is 200, you
cannot record any more.
yy
When the full duration of the recording is
played back, the screen will stay in the
stopped condition for 10 seconds and then
automatically end the playback.
yy
The recording can be played back even during the recording/reserved recording.
yy
During the playback of the recording, the
hard disk can generate a certain level of
noise.
yy
This noise is irrelevant from the performance
and reliability of the product and is normal for
a hard drive to have a certain level of noise.
yy
The programme recorded at other TV can’t
be played back in accordance with copyright
policy. If you attempt to play back the programme recorded at other TV, you will see a
black screen.
89
DVR Function
Mark Mode
Playing Recorded programmes
Play
Recorded List
USB
Page Change
Free Space 100GB
79h 03m
31h 37m
USB1 XTICK
Mark Mode 1/1 Page
D1
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
You can play a selected programme from the
recorded list.
D2
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
1
D3
Playing time 00:02:30 /Date:2010.01.01
2
3
��
00:35
05:35
� � � ꕚ ꕙ � Clip-Edit
� Unmark All
� Mark All
� Play Marked
� Delete Marked
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Green button to select Recorded List.
3 Press FAV to mark your desired recorded
programme.
4 Press Navigation buttons to select a desired
recorded programme.
5 Press Yellow button to play the marked
Red button
Green button
Yellow button
Blue button
FAV
� Option � Hide
Exit
Description
Unmark All: Change marked recorded
programmes to unmarked recorded
programmes.
Mark All: Mark all recorded
programmes in the list.
Play Marked: Play the first selected
file. Once recorded programmes
finishes playing, the next selected one
will be played automatically.
Delete Marked: Delete the marked
recorded programmes.
Exit Mark Mode.
1 After connecting USB device, press the OK
button.
2 Press Green button to select Recorded List.
3 Press Navigation buttons to recorded
programme and press OK.
4 Press Green button to select Option and press
OK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
When you return to the previous menu, press
BACK.
Menu
Description
Play on previous Resumes playing at the previously
playtime.
stopped point.
Play from the start
Rename
Delete
Playback of selected recorded
programmes.
Rename the programme.
Delete the programme.
ENGLISH
ENG
recorded programme.
Button
� Repeat
Exit Mark Mode
90
DVR Function
The ‘Progress Bar’?
This function indicates what recorded programme reviewing is possible, a current onscreen and live broadcasting position.
1
Preview
2
Current location and progress time in playback
3
Total progress time of the recorded programme
ENGLISH
ENG
Playback
Fast forward
Rewind
Pause
Direct view +
Direct view By one screen
Slow playback
(Blue) Start repeat interval
(Yellow) Start clip-edit interval
(Blue) End repeat interval
(Yellow) End clip-edit interval
Repeating interval
Use of remote control
You can adjust various method during the recorded
programme play.
Button
Green button
Yellow button
Blue button
, OK
Description
During playback,
repeatedly, press the REW ( ) or FF
( ) button to speed up.
- Every time you press the button, the
search speed will increase by stage
(up to 4 stages).
Option: Press Green button to input
video and audio settings for recorded
files.
Clip-Edit:
Press Yellow button at the starting point
where you want to set the Interval clipedit and press it again at the ending
point. To save, select Yes.
- The start of the Interval clip-edit
is displayed as
and end of
the Interval clip-edit as
in the
recording progress bar at the bottom
of the screen. Start and end of the
Interval clip-edit can be set both in
forward and reverse direction.
- Interval shorter than 10 seconds
cannot be saved.
Repeat:
Press the Blue button at the starting
point where you want to set the
Interval repeat and press it again
at the ending point. To cancel the
playback for the interval repeat, press
Blue button one more time.
- The start of the Interval repeat
is displayed as
and end of
the Interval repeat as
in the
recording progress bar at the bottom
of the screen. Start and end of the
Interval repeat can be set both in
forward and reverse direction.
- Interval shorter than 10 seconds
cannot be set.
- When the Interval repeat is
cancelled, it will return to normal
playback from the end point of the
interval.
During playback, press the Pause( ) button.
- Pause screen is displayed.
- Every time you press the Pause( )
button from the pause screen, it will move
screen by screen ( ).
- Press the Pause( ) button and then use
the FF ( ) button for slow motion ( ).
- If you don’t press any button 10
minutes after the pause, it will return
to the playback.
When you move the cursor using the
navigation ( ) button during playback,
and then press the OK button, the
screen will directly play at the
applicable screen where the cursor is
located. (
)
3D
(Only 3D mod- Uses for viewing 3D video.
els)
EPG Function
EPG (Electronic Programme
Guide) Function (In digital
mode)
91
Tyra
DTV 18 The HITS
28 Sep. 2008 21:00~00:00
Record
Remind
Close
This system has an Electronic Programme Guide
(EPG) to help your navigation through all the
possible viewing options.
The EPG supplies information such as programme
listings, start and end times for all available services.
In addition, detailed information about the
programme is often available in the EPG (the
availability and amount of these programme details
will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster).
This function can be used only when the EPG
information is broadcast by broadcasting companies.
You must set the Clock in the Time menu, before
using EPG function.
The EPG displays the programme details for 8 days.
DTV
18 The HITS
Movers and Shakers : 86-06
18:00
19:30
Next
Pr. Change
Watch
Record : A pop-up window for record settings
appear.
Remind : Reserved.
Select Timer Record/Remind setting mode.
Wed. 7 Feb. 19:28
MHEG ... 4:3 576i
yy
Press INFO to show current programme
information.
Displayed with a TV or DTV Programme.
Displayed with a Radio Programme.
Displayed with a MHEG Programme.
Displayed with a MPEG Programme.
Switch on/off EPG
ENGLISH
ENG
A look back at the hottest dance moves of the past 20 years.
MPEG
OK
1 Press GUIDE to switch on or off EPG.
Select a programme
1 Press Navigation buttons or P
to select
desired programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme.
Displayed with a Teletext Programme.
Displayed with a Subtitle Programme.
Displayed with a Scramble Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital Programme.
Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme.
576i/p,
720p, Resolution of broadcasting programme.
1080i/p
Broadcasted programme with the icon may not
be displayed in Monitor Out depending on the
information of the programme.
Displayed with a MHP Programme.
>
Shows next programme information.
Shows other programme information.
Programme Guide
▲
That ’70s show
25 Nov. 2008 10:05
DTV 1 YLE TV1 25 Nov. 2008 09:45~10:15
ALL
NOW
1 YLE TV1
2 YLE TV2
4 TV..
5 YLE FST
6 CNN
NEXT
Keno
World Business
Fantomen
Kritiskt
ABC
That ’70s show
Your World Today
Legenen om Den....
Naturtimmen
Lyssna
▼
INFO i Information
Mode
Watch/Schedule
Manual Timer
TV/
RAD
RADIO
Schedule List
Exit
FAV
Favourite
92
EPG Function
NOW/NEXT Guide Mode
You can view a programme being broadcasted and
one scheduled to follow.
Button
Red button
Yellow button
Blue button
OK
Description
Change EPG mode.
Enter Manual Timer mode. (See p.85)
Enter Schedule List mode. (See p.86)
When ‘NOW’ is selected, it is moved to
selected Programme and EPG disappears.
When ‘NEXT’ is selected, a reservation
pop-up window appears.
Select NOW or NEXT Programme.
Date Change Mode
Button
Green button
Description
Switch off Date setting mode.
BACK
OK
Change to the selected date.
Select a date.
GUIDE
EXIT
Switch off EPG.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
P
GUIDE
Page Up/Down.
BACK
Switch off EPG.
EXIT
TV/RAD
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
INFO
Detail information on or off.
FAV
Change Favourite mode.
ENGLISH
ENG
8 Day Guide Mode
Button
Red button
Green button
Yellow button
Blue button
OK
Description
Change EPG mode.
Enter Date setting mode.
Enter Manual Timer mode. (See p.85)
Enter Schedule List mode. (See p.86)
When ‘Currently broadcasting programme’ is selected, it is moved to selected programme and EPG disappears.
When ‘Future broadcasting programme’
is selected, a reservation pop-up window
appears.
Select Programme.
Select the Broadcast Programme.
P
GUIDE
Page Up/Down.
BACK
Switch off EPG.
EXIT
TV/RAD
Select DTV or RADIO Programme.
INFO
Detail information on or off.
FAV
Change Favourite mode.
Extended Description Box
Button
INFO
Description
The detail information on or off.
Text Up/Down.
Select Timer Record/Remind setting
mode.
GUIDE
EXIT
Switch off EPG.
3D IMAGING
3D IMAGING
(Only 3D Models)
3D Technology
This TV can display in 3D via 3D broadcasting or
when the TV is connected to a compatible device,
such as a Blu-ray 3D Player. The viewer must
wear compatible 3D glasses in order to see these
images in 3D format.
WARNING
yyWarning for photosensitization seizure:
Some viewers may experience a seizure or
epilepsy when exposed to certain factors,
including flashing lights or images in TV or
video games. If you or anybody from your
family has a history of epilepsy or seizure,
please consult with your doctor before
watching 3D TV.
Also certain symptoms can occur in
unspecified conditions without any previous
history. If you experience any of the following
symptoms, immediately stop watching the 3D
imaging and consult a doctor: dizziness or
light-headedness, visual transition or altered
vision, visual or facial instability, such as eye or
muscle twitching, unconscious action,
convulsion, loss of conscience, confusion
or disorientation, loss of directional sense,
cramps, or nausea. Parents should monitor
their children, including teenagers, for these
symptoms as they may be more sensitive to
the effects of watching 3D TV.
yyRisk of photosensitization seizure can be
reduced with the following actions.
» Take frequent breaks from watching 3D TV.
» For those who have vision that is different
in each eye, they should watch the TV after
taking vision correction measures.
» Watch the TV so that your eyes are on the
same level as the 3D screen and refrain
from sitting too closely to the TV.
» Do not watch the 3D imaging when tired or
sick, and avoid watching the 3D imaging for
a long period of time.
» Do not wear the 3D glasses for any other
purpose than viewing 3D imaging on a 3D
TV.
» Some viewers may feel disoriented after
watching 3D TV. Therefore, after you watch
3D TV, take a moment to regain awareness
of your situation before moving.
ENGLISH
ENG
yyWe recommend that you maintain a distance of
at least twice the screen diagonal length when
watching 3D videos.
yyTo watch the TV in 3D, you must put on your
3D glasses. For best results, you should wear
LG Brand 3D glasses. The 3D imaging may
not display properly when using another brand
of 3D glasses. Please see the 3D glasses
manual for instructions on how to use the 3D
glasses.
yyWhen watching 2D images, it is recommended
to take off the 3D glasses. If you watch 2D
images with the 3D glasses on, you may see
distorted images.
yyIf you watch the 3D imaging too closely or for a
long period of time, it may harm your eyesight.
yyWatching the TV or playing video games that
incorporate 3D imaging with the 3D glasses for
a long period of time can cause drowsiness,
headaches or fatigue to you and/or your eyes.
If you have a headache, or otherwise feel
fatigued or drowsy, stop watching the TV and
have a rest.
yyPregnant woman, seniors, persons with heart
problems or persons who experience frequent
drowsiness should refrain from watching 3D
TV.
yySome 3D imaging may cause you to duck or
dodge the image displayed in the video.
Therefore, it is best if you do not watch 3D TV
near fragile objects or near any objects that
can be knocked over easily.
yyPlease prevent children under the age of 5
from watching 3D TV. It may affect their vision
development.
93
94
3D IMAGING
NOTE
(Only 32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**)
yy
When watching digital TV in 3D imaging
mode, monitor out signals cannot be output
through the SCART cable.
yy
If you set the 3D mode to On while a
scheduled recording is performed on digital
TV, monitor out signals cannot be output
through the SCART cable, and the recording
cannot be performed.
yy
If 3D TV broadcast standard changes in the
future and it is not supported by this TV set,
you may need a separate device, such as a
set-top-box.
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
(Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**)
yy
After powering on the TV, a few seconds
may be needed for your TV to calibrate.
yy
If there is an obstacle between the TV and
the 3D glasses, the 3D imaging may not
display properly.
yy
Do not use the TV in close proximity to other
electronic equipments and RF equipments.
yy
When watching digital TV in 3D imaging
mode, monitor out signals cannot be output
through the SCART cable.
yy
If you set the 3D mode to On while a
scheduled recording is performed on digital
TV, monitor out signals cannot be output
through the SCART cable, and the recording
cannot be performed.
yy
The 3D imaging may not display if it is
viewed while you are lying down.
yy
It may take a moment for you to see the
3D imaging if you look away from the TV
and then revert your eyes back to the 3D
programme.
yy
The TV may flicker slightly if the 3D imaging
is displayed under fluorescent. In such
instances, It is recommended to turn the
lights off or to dim the lights.
yy
If 3D TV broadcast standard changes in the
future and it is not supported by this TV set,
you may need a separate device, such as a
set-top-box.
When using 3D Glasses
CAUTION
yy
Do not use the 3D glasses to replace
your corrective glasses, sunglasses or
protective goggles.
yy
Do not store the 3D glasses in hot or cold
locations.
yy
Do not drop objects onto the 3D glasses.
Do not drop or bend the glasses.
yy
Since the lenses of the 3D glasses are
easily scratched, make sure to clean
only with a soft cloth. Shake off any dust
before using the cloth since the glasses
are easily scratched.
yy
A communication failure may occur if the
glasses are near electronic devices that
use the same bandwidth (2.4 GHz), such
as a microwave oven or wireless LAN
product.
3D Imaging Viewing Range
(Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**)
TV size, viewing angle & other circumstances may
change the viewing distance and the angle of view.
Viewing Distance
2 m to 7 m
Maximum Viewing
Distance
10 m
3D IMAGING
Viewing 3D Imaging
Setting 3D Imaging
1 Play the video produced in 3D.
1 Press the 3D OPTION while viewing 3D
2 Press 3D to watch 3D imaging.
imaging. A pop-up window will appears.
3 Wear the 3D glasses.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll the OK
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one
of the following options and press OK.
Choose options.
and press OK.
5 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll the
3D Mode Setting
shape and press OK. (See "3D supported
mode")
Mode
2D 3D
Description
Changed from 2D imaging to
3D imaging.
2D-to-3D converted videos
may appear less realistic than
titles originally produced as 3D
videos.
Set Video.
Set Audio.
Close
3D Mode Setting
Option
(Depending on
model)
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
Frame Sequential
6 Press 3D button to 2D Off or 3D Off.
Option
3D Off
Description
Displays images in 2D without
any 3D effects.
Displays images in original
format.
2D -> 3D
Displays images in 3D.
Cancel
Close the pop-up window.
3D -> 2D
Description
3D Picture Size
Cuts off the outer edges of the
picture and stretch it to fit the full
screen in 3D mode.
3D Depth
Adjusts the stereoscopic effect of
the 3D image converted from a 2D
image.
3D Viewpoint
Moves the 3D image to the front
and back to adjust the 3D perspective view.
3D Picture
Balance
Adjusts the colour and brightness
difference between the right and
left sides of the picture in 3D mode.
3D Picture
Correction
Select Left/Right or Right/Left.
Select the screen with 3D video
with better visibility.
3D Optimization
Optimizes the 3D image screen for
the viewing environment.
Set Video.
Allows you to change Video settings. (Refer to
“PICTURE Settings”)
Set Audio.
Allows you to change Audio settings. (Refer to
“AUDIO Settings”)
ENGLISH
ENG
Side by Side
95
96
3D IMAGING
CAUTION
yy
Some menus may not work while viewing
3D imaging.
yy
The 3D imaging is disabled automatically
when switching DTV channels, or input
source.
yy
The screen may not be displayed properly if you view 2D images in 3D imaging
mode.
yy
3D effect can be seen when 3D Mode is
selected appropriately for the 3D input
signal supplied to the TV.
yy
For *mpo files (3D camera files), the 3D
imaging mode is enabled automatically.
NOTE
(Only 32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**)
yy
If you select 3D mode, “Power indicator” is
turned off automatically.
yy
You can only choose “Off or Cinema” with
the AV MODE button on the remote control.
yy
Energy Saving is disabled while playing in
3D.
yy
You cannot enter the Home menu while
watching 3D files.
NOTE
(Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**)
yy
You cannot enter the Home menu while
watching 3D files.
ENGLISH
ENG
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
97
CUSTOMIZING TV SETTINGS
The SETUP Menu
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to select the SETUP menu and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of the following menus and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option you want and press OK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
Menu
Description
Sets up and edit programmes.
PICTURE
Adjusts the image size, quality, or effect.
AUDIO
Adjusts the sound quality, effect, or volume level.
TIME
Sets the time, date, or timer feature.
LOCK
Locks or unlocks channels and programmes.
OPTION
Customizes the general settings.
NETWORK
Sets up the network setting.
SUPPORT
Checks the customer information.
ENGLISH
ENG
SETUP
98
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Customizing Settings
SETUP Settings
SETUP
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
●
Auto Tuning
●
Manual Tuning
●
Programme Edit
●
Booster
●
CI Information
Move
OK
Exit
: On
OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available programme settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
ENGLISH
ENG
Auto Tuning
Tunes and stores all available programmes through antennas or cable or satellite inputs.
(See p.32)
Manual Tuning
Tunes and stores the programmes you want manually. (See p.37)
Programme Edit
Edits programmes. (See p.40)
Booster
Sets to the optimised sensitivity depending on the signal reception. (See p.41)
CI Information
Enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). (See p.41)
Cable DTV Setting
Sets various options for viewing cable DTV. (See p.35)
(In Cable, Cable & Satellite(Only satellite models) mode
only)
Satellite DTV Setting
(In Satellite, Antenna &
Satellite, Cable & Satellite
mode only-Only satellite
models)
Sets various options for viewing satellite DTV. (See p.35)
Tivu Programme List
Update
(In Satellite, Antenna &
Satellite, Cable & Satellite
mode only-Only satellite
models, Only Italy)
It updates the changed Programme List information by based on country broadcasting
circumstance and satellite. (See p.36)
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
PICTURE Settings
PICTURE
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
●
Aspect Ratio
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
●
Picture Wizard
●
ꕊ
●
Picture Mode
OK.
Move
OK
99
Exit
: 16:9
Energy Saving : Off
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to PICTURE and press
OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
: Standard
● Backlight
70
● Contrast
100
● Brightness
50
● Sharpness
70
● Colour
60
● Tint
0
R
G
● Colour Temp.
0
W
C
● Advanced Control
● Picture Reset
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
●
Screen
The available picture settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
Changes the image size to view images at its optimal size. (See p.42)
Set 3D Video
(Only 3D models)
Sets the 3D imaging option. (See p.93)
Picture Wizard
Adjusts the image quality and calibrates the screen.
The customized options will be saved as Expert1 in the Picture Mode.
NOTE
yyIf you use Picture Wizard, the Energy saving feature will turn off automatically.
yyTo reset changes made by Picture Wizard, operate Picture Reset when Picture Mode
is on Expert1.
yyIn RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness
values are not applied.
Energy Saving
Reduces the power consumption by adjusting the screen brightness.
NOTE
yyWhen adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG/MHP mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied
after MHEG/MHP is finished.
yySelecting ‘Screen Off’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption.
yyWhen selecting Auto or Maximum, Backlight will not work. (Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
Option
Auto
The backlight is adjusted automatically corresponding to the surroundings
(Only LED LCD TV when selecting Auto using the Intelligent sensor feature.
/ LCD TV)
Intelligent sensor The most suitable picture is automatically adjusted corresponding to the
(Only Plasma TV) surroundings.
Off
Select if this feature is not necessary.
Minimum/Medium/Maximum
Selects the brightness level.
Screen off
The screen turns off in 3 seconds.
Pressing any button of the remote control will turn on the screen again.
ENGLISH
ENG
Aspect Ratio
100
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
Picture Mode
Description
Selects one of the preset image or customizes options in each mode for the best TV screen performance. You are also able to customize advanced options of each mode.
The available preset picture modes vary depending on the TV.
NOTE
yyIf you select Intelligent Sensor, the Energy saving feature will switch to Auto
automatically. (Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
yyIf you selecting THX Cinema or THX Bright Room, the Aspect ratio feature will switch to
Just scan automatically.
Mode (Depending on model)
Intelligent Sensor
Sets the TV to adjust the image settings, such as contrast, brightness,
sharpness, colour, or tint, automatically corresponding to the surrounding
environments.
Vivid
Adjusts the video image for the retail environment by enhancing the contrast, brightness, colour, and sharpness.
Standard
Adjusts the image for the normal environment.
Maximizes video images reducing power consumption without hurting picture quality.
Optimizes video images for a cinematic look to enjoy movies as if you are in
a movie theatre.
THX Cinema,
THX Bright Room
Provides a cinema experience while watching a movie at home. The user
will be able enjoy the best level of screen quality in without any separate
adjustments.
- THX Cinema express the optimal screen quality when the room is dark.
-T
HX Bright Room express the optimal screen quality when the room is
bright.
ENGLISH
ENG
Cinema
NOTE
yyTHX : THX (Thomlinson Holman’s Experiment) is an audio and video
certification standard established by George Lucas and Thomlinson.
A THX certified display guarantees screen quality that exceeds the
display standard specification in both hardware and software.
Sport
Optimizes the video image for high and dynamic actions by emphasizing
primary colours such as white, grass, or sky blue.
Game
Optimizes the video image for a fast gaming screen for PCs or games.
Photo
Optimizes the still image like a photo file in HDMI, USB mode.
»»e.g.) when connecting the external device like a DSLR.
Expert
Adjusts the detailed video image settings for video experts as well as general viewers.
NOTE
yyISFccc (ISFccc: Imaging Science Foundation Certified Calibration
Control) : This TV contains the detailed calibrations necessary for
professional certification by the Imaging Science Foundation. The
resulting ISF “day” and “night” modes will then be accessible by the
user to experience the best their LG HDTV has to offer.
Sophisticated and detailed calibrations can be made through the
ISFccc mode.
Detailed calibration requires a licensed technician. Please contact
your local dealer to inquire about an ISF certified technician.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
TruMotion
(Depending on
model)
101
Description
Advance video technology that provides clearer, smoother images, even during fast action scenes
creating a more stable structure for a crisper picture.
TruMotion works with all inputs except PC mode.
NOTE
yyIf you enable “TruMotion”, noise may appear on the screen. If this occurs, set “TruMotion”
to “Off”.
yyIf you select “Picture Mode-Game ”, set “TruMotion” to “Off”.
Mode
Screen
High
Provides smoother picture movement.
Low
Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use.
Off
Turn off TruMotion operation.
User
De-Judder: Adjusts noise of the screen.
De-Blur: Adjusts after-image of the screen.
Customizes the PC display options.
Option
Selects a proper resolution when your PC uses.
Auto Config.
Sets the TV to optimize the options automatically for the TV display.
Position
Locates the image at the proper position.
Size
Adjusts the image size.
Phase
Eliminates horizontal streaking.
Reset
Restores the options to the default setting.
After analysing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to
improve the contrast ratio.
Mode
Off
Turn off LED Local Dimming operation.
Low
Brightens the picture and deepens black levels using the soft local dimming.
Medium
Deepens black levels using the strong local dimming.
High
Clears the picture and deepens black levels using the strong local dimming.
ENGLISH
ENG
LED Local Dimming
(Depending on
model)
Resolution
102
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Basic image options
Setting
Backlight
(Only LED LCD TV /
LCD TV)
Description
Adjusts the brightness of the screen by controlling the LCD backlight. If you decrease the
brightness level, the screen becomes darker and the power consumption will be reduced without any video signal loss.
NOTE
yyIf you use the “Energy Saving - Off, Minimum, Medium”, Backlight will be available.
Contrast
Increases or decreases the gradient of the video signal. You may use Contrast when the
bright part of the picture is saturated.
Brightness
Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture.
Sharpness
Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture.
The lower the level, the softer the image.
Colour
Adjusts intensity of all colours.
Tint
Adjusts the balance between red and green levels.
Colour Temp.
Set to warm to enhance hotter colours such as red, or set to cool to enhance cooler colours
such as blue.
Advanced Control or
Expert Control
Customizes the advanced options.
Picture Reset
Restores the options of each mode to the factory default.
NOTE
yy
It is not available to use this function in Intelligent Sensor,
ENGLISH
ENG
, THX Cinema, THX Bright Room.
yyYou cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode.
yyWhen the Expert 1/2 is selected, you can select Backlight, Contrast, Brightness, H Sharpness, V Sharpness, Colour or Tint.
Advanced image options (Depending on model)
Setting
Description
Dynamic Contrast
Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of the screen. The
picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker.
Dynamic Colour
Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances
hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue and green white look more vivid.
Clear White
Make the white area of screen brighter and more white.
Skin Colour
It detects the skin area of video and adjusts it to express a natural skin colour.
Noise Reduction
Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality.
Super Resolution
Provides a crystal-clear picture by improving the details in an area that has a blurry or unclear picture.
MPEG Noise Reduc- Removes noise caused by compressing video.
tion
Gamma
You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture.
»»Low: Make the dark and middle gray level areas brighter.
»»Medium: Express the original picture level.
»»High: Make the dark and middle gray level area darker.
Black Level
ets black level of the screen to proper level. This function is available in the following modes:
S
TV(NTSC-M/J, PAL-M, PAL-N), AV (NTSC-M/J, PAL-M, PAL-N), HDMI or Component.
»»Auto: Sets black level of the screen to High or Low automatically according to the input
signal level.
»»Low: The reflection of the screen gets darker.
»»High: The reflection of the screen gets brighter.
Eye Care
Adjusts the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too bright. Dims extremely bright pictures.
This feature is enabled in “Picture Mode-Standard, Game”.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
103
Description
Real Cinema or Film
Mode
Makes video clips recorded in film look more natural by eliminating judder effect.
Uses this function when you watch film-originated movie contents.
This function can also work when TruMotion is off.
Colour Gamut
LED LCD TV / LCD
TV
Advanced Control
»» Maximizes the utilization of colour to increase colour quality.
»» Standard: Displays standard set of colours.
»» Wide: Increase number of colours used.
Expert Control
Displays colour domain of the signal.
»» Standard: Displays standard set of colours.
»» Wide: Increase number of colours used.
»» EBU: Mode to display EBU standard colour area.
»» SMPTE: Mode to display SMPTE standard colour area.
»» BT709: Mode to display BT709 standard colour area.
Plasma TV
Advanced Control, Expert Control
»» Maximizes the utilization of colour to increase colour quality.
»» Standard: Displays standard set of colours.
»» Wide: Increase number of colours used.
Photo mode
»» Wide: Increase number of colours used.
»» sRGB: Mode to display sRGB standard colour gamut.
Shows clearer and distinctive yet natural edges of the video.
This function works well over Sharpness UI 60 value.
xvYCC
This feature is not available for all models.
This is produces richer colours.
This feature represents rich colours as much as a conventional video signal.
This function is enabled in “Picture mode - Cinema, Expert” when xvYCC signal is inputted
through HDMI.
Expert Pattern
This is the pattern used for expert adjustment.
This function is enabled in “Picture Mode - Expert” when you watch DTV.
Colour Filter
This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video.
You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately.
Colour Temperature
Adjusts the overall colour of the screen by changing the white baseline.
Colour Management
System
LED LCD TV / LCD
TV
a. Method : 2 Points
yyPattern: Inner, Outer
yyRed/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. Method : 10 Point IRE
yyPattern: Inner, Outer
yyIRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of
the video signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100. You can
adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.
yyLuminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for
2.2 gamma. You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE,
than the target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at
every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.
yyRed/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
c. Apply to all inputs
Plasma TV
a. Method : 2 Points
yyPattern: Inner, Outer
yyRed/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
b. Method : 20 Point IRE
yyPattern: Inner, Outer
yyIRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of
the video signal and can be set among 5, 10, 15 to 100. You can
adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting.
yyRed/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50.
c. Apply to all inputs
As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this does not
affect other colours but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/
Cyan/Magenta/Yellow).
Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general
video.
Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta.
»»Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Colour: The adjustment range is -30 to +30.
»»Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan, Magenta Tint: The adjustment range is -30 to +30.
This feature is disabled in RGB-PC and HDMI-PC mode.
ENGLISH
ENG
Edge Enhancer
104
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
AUDIO Settings
AUDIO
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
● Auto
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
● Balance
OK.
Volume
● Clear
Voice II
● Sound
Mode
Move
Exit
OK
: Off
: Off
ꕅ
2
0
L
R
: Standard
• Infinite 3D Surround: Off
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to AUDIO and press
OK.
• Treble
50
• Bass
50
• Sound Reset
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or
option you want and press OK.
● Sound
Optimizer
● Digital
Audio Out
● TV
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
Speaker
: Normal
: PCM
: On
● ARC
Mode
: On
● DTV
Audio Setting
: Auto
● AV
Sync.
: Off
The available audio settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
ENGLISH
ENG
Auto Volume
Activates the Auto Volume feature to keep the volume level consistent whenever you change
channels. The volume level may not be consistent due to different signal conditions of broadcasting
stations.
Clear Voice
Sets whether to enhance human voice clarity. You can adjust the level of clarity when you set this
feature on.
Balance
Adjust balance between the left and right speakers according to your room environment.
Sound Mode
Selects one of the preset sound modes or customizes options in each mode.
Mode
Standard
Select when you want standard-quality sound.
Music
Select when you listen to music.
Cinema
Select when you watch movies.
Sport
Select when you watch sports events.
Game
Select when you play games.
NOTE
yyIf sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate
home theatre system or amplifier to cope with different user environments.
yyIf you select “On” for Clear Voice II, Infinite 3D Surround feature will not work.
Option
Sound Optimizer
Infinite 3D Surround
Patents LG proprietary sound processing technology that strives immersive 5.1 surround sound with just two front speakers.
Treble
Controls the dominant sounds in the output. When you turn up the
treble, it will increase the output to the higher frequency range.
Bass
Controls the softer sounds in the output. When you turn up the bass,
it will increase the output to the lower frequency range.
Sound Reset
Resets the sound mode to the default setting.
Optimizes the sound depending on the environment in which the TV is installed.
Option
Normal
Normal sound mode.
Wall Mount Type
Optimized sound mode for a wall-mounted TV.
Stand Type
Optimized sound mode for a stand-type TV.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
Digital Audio
Out
TV Speaker
105
Description
This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output.
When Dolby Digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony
Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital.
If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when Dolby Digital is not available, SPDIF output will
be PCM(Pulse-code modulation).
Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby
Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played.
Item
Audio Input
Digital Audio output
Auto
MPEG
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
PCM
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital
PCM
All
PCM
Turns on the internal speaker of the TV when using an external Hi-Fi system. You can use the TV
speaker as an audio output device even if there is no video input.
NOTE
yyWhen the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theatre is operating, the sound
output automatically switches to the Home theatre speaker, but when the TV speaker is
turned on, the sound output the TV speaker.
yySome menus in AUDIO are disabled when TV speaker is set to Off.
ARC Mode
(Audio Return
Channel)
When using an external audio device with the ARC (Audio Return Channel) feature, SPDIF can be
output using only a High Speed HDMI cable without an additional optical cable.
Option
DTV Audio Setting
(In digital mode)
AV Sync.
On
If the device with the ARC feature is turned on, the device speaker is
automatically used when SIMPLINK is enabled.
Off
Even if the device with the ARC feature is turned on and SIMPLINK is
enabled, the device speaker is not automatically used.
When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type
you want.
Mode
Auto
Automatically outputs in the order Dolby Digital+ > Dolby Digital >
MPEG.(Except for Italy)
Automatically outputs in the order Dolby Digital+ > MPEG > Dolby
Digital.(Only Italy)
Dolby Digital+, Dolby
Digital, MPEG
Allows users to select the audio type they want.
e.g.) If MPEG is selected, MPEG is always outputted.
If MPEG is not supported, another audio type is set in that order.
If the video and sound are not synced, you can adjust it manually.
(-) setting : Make audio output faster than the default.
(+) setting : Make audio output slower than the default.
Option
AV Sync.
Adjusts the sync of the TV speaker and SPDIF.
TV Speaker
Adjusts the sync of the sound from the TV's internal speaker.
SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital
InterFace)
Adjusts the sync of the sound from an external speaker connected to
the digital audio output port.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
yySome HDMI cables may not support this mode. (A High Speed HDMI cable is recommended.)
yy
The ARC mode only works on the HDMI 1 (Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV) or HDMI 3 (Only
Plasma TV) input on the TV.
yyActivates the SIMPLINK feature to use this feature.
106
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)
When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme
number and station name.
1 Press Q. MENU.
2 Press the Navigation button to access the Audio or Audio Language and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation button to scroll to the sound output and press OK.
Broadcast
Mono
Stereo
Dual
On Screen Display
MONO
STEREO
DUAL I , DUAL II , DUAL I + II
yy
Mono sound selection
If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the clarity of
sound is improved.
yy
Language selection for dual language broadcast
If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I,
DUAL II or DUAL I+II.
ENGLISH
ENG
DUAL I DUAL I I DUAL I+I I Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers.
Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker.
Nicam Reception (In Analogue Mode Only)
If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous
Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received.
Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received.
1 When NICAM mono is received, you can select NICAM MONO or FM MONO.
2 When NICAM stereo is received, you can select NICAM STEREO or FM MONO.
If the stereo signal is weak, switch to FM MONO.
3 When NICAM dual is received, you can select NICAM DUAL I, NICAM DUAL II or NICAM DUAL I+II or
FM MONO.
Speaker Sound Output Selection
In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and right loudspeakers.
Select the sound output.
L+R: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from audio R input is
sent to the right loudspeaker.
L+L: Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
R+R: Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
TIME Settings
TIME
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
OK.
Move
OK
●
Clock
●
Off Time
: Off
●
On Time
: Off
●
Sleep Timer
: Off
●
Automatic Standby
: 4 hours
107
Exit
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to TIME and press
OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available time settings are described in the following:
Setting
Clock
Description
Sets the time, date, time zone, and daylight-saving time feature.
The time will be set automatically according to a digital channel signal which includes time
information provided by the broadcasting station. If not, set the time and date manually.
yyThe TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich
Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically
by a digital signal.
yyWhen if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour.
yyTime Zone menu can be changed in Auto mode.
Time Zone
Moscow
Yekaterinburg
Omsk
Krasnoyarsk
Irkutsk
Yakutsk
Vladivostok
Magadan
Kaliningrad
This Table means the Time Zone table of 9 area of Russia,
and when the user selects the Time Zone for his or her
area, it automatically sets the time for the corresponding
area.
However, even though the user selected his or her area, if
the broadcasting station’s local time offset is not offered, or
if the region information does not match, then the user may
select the Offset from the Time Zone to set the correct time.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
108
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
Off Time/
On Time
Description
Sets the time to turn on or off the TV automatically. To use this function, you should set the current
time and date in advance.
NOTE
yyIf you do not press any button within 2 hours after the TV turns on by the On Time feature,
the TV enters the Standby mode automatically.
yyIf you set both Off time and On time features to the same time, the Off time feature over
rides the On time feature.
Sleep Timer
Sets the length of time until the TV to turns off. When you turn the TV off and turn it on again, the
Sleep timer feature will be set to off.
Automatic
Standby
(Depending on
model)
If you do not press any button when Automatic Standby function is on, the TV automatically
switches to the standby mode.
NOTE
yyThis function does not work on Store Demo mode or while software update.
ENGLISH
ENG
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
LOCK Settings
LOCK
● Set
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
OK.
OK
Exit
Password
● Lock
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
Move
109
System
: Off
● Block Programme
● Parental Guidance : Blocking Off
● Input Block
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to LOCK and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available lock settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
Changes the 4-digit password. The default PIN is ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’.
When France is selected for Country, password is not ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’ but ‘1’,’2’,’3’,’4’.
When France is selected for Country, password cannot be set as ‘0’,‘0’,‘0’,‘0’ .
If you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’,‘2’, ‘5’ on the remote control handset.
Lock System
Activates or deactivates the lock system.
Block
Programme
Blocks the programmes that contain inappropriate contents for children. The programmes can be
selected but the screen blank and the audio is muted.
To watch a locked programme, enter the password.
It is available to use this function in Lock System "On".
Parental
Guidance
This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal
has incorrect information, this function does not operate.
A password is required to gain access to this menu.
This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off.
Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set.
Enter a password to watch a blocked programme.
Rating differs by country.
Input Block
Block the input sources.
It is available to use this function in Lock System "On".
ENGLISH
ENG
Set Password
110
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
OPTION Settings
OPTION
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
Move
OK
Exit
● Language(Language)
● Country
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
: UK
● Disability
OK.
● Power
Assistance
Indicator
● Pointer
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to OPTION and press
● Smart
OK.
Share Setting
● Factory
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
● Set
● Mode
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
Reset
ID
:1
Setting
: Home Use
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available general settings are described in the following:
Setting
Language
Description
Selects a language for the display or audio.
Option
Menu Language
Select your desired language.
Audio Language
The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language.
If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played.
ENGLISH
ENG
Audio Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
MPEG Audio
Dolby Digital Audio
Audio for “Visual Impaired”
Audio for “Hearing Impaired”
Dolby Digital Plus Audio
MUTE
Subtitle Language
Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are
broadcast. If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the
default language subtitle will be displayed.
Subtitle Language OSD Information
Display
N.A
Status
Not Available
Teletext Subtitle
Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing”
Text Language
In Digital mode, use the Text language function when two or more Text
languages are broadcast. If teletext data in a selected language is not
broadcast, the default Text language page will be displayed.
NOTE
yyWhen the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language
and Text Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category.
yyThe audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by
the service provider.
yyWhen you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may
output a part of the Main audio.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
Country
111
Description
Selects a desired country. (Depending on model)
NOTE
yyIf you do not finish the set-up Installation Guide by pressing BACK or if you
time out on the OSD (On Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the TV is switched on.
If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on
yy
the screen and some problems may occur during teletext operation.
The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country
yy
broadcasting circumstances.
DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcastyy
ing circumstances.
In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV funcyy
tion may not work depending on digital broadcasting circumstances.
The Country Setting “UK” should only be activated in UK.
yy
If the country setting is set to “--”, European terrestrial digital standard
yy
broadcasting programmes are available, but some DTV functions may not
work properly.
Disability Assistance
(In digital mode)
Audio commentary or subtitles are provided for those who are hard of hearing or visually
impaired.
Option
ISM Method
(Only Plasma TV)
This function if for the hearing impaired.
If it is set to on, the subtitle is displayed by default.
Audio Description
This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV programme in addition to the
basic audio.
When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio
Description are provided only for those programmes that have Audio
Description included.
Volume
Changes the Audio Description volume.
Beep
Beeps when a programme with Audio Description information is
selected.
Sets to turn on or off the indicator light on the TV.
Option
Standby Light
Set to turn on or off the indicator light in Standby mode.
Power Light
Set to turn on or off the indicator light when you turn on the power.
Prevents image sticking or removes a ghost image.
A frozen still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods can result in a ghost image.
Option
Normal
Sets it if image sticking is never a problem.
Orbiter
Avoids a ghost image on the screen.
The image will move every 2 minutes to help prevent ghost images.
However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the
screen.
Colour Wash
Removes a ghost image on the screen.
The colour block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is difficult to see the after image on
all colours.
Once it has been corrected it will not be visible in any colour.
White Wash
Removes a ghost image on the screen.
Use sparingly. Watch the TV normally for a while before using this
feature to see if the ghost image disappears on its own.
NOTE
yyAn excessive ghosted image may be impossible to clear
entirely with White Wash. To return to normal viewing,
press the any button.
ENGLISH
ENG
Power Indicator
(Only LED LCD TV)
Hard of Hearing
112
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
Setting
Description
HbbTV
(Depending on model)
LED LCD TV / LCD TV : This function works in Germany, France only.
Plasma TV : This function works in Germany only.
The service may be limited when the device is not connected to the network.
Pointer
(Depending on model)
Sets the pointer option of the magic motion remote control.
Smart Share Setting
Option
Speed
Changes the pointer speed.
Shape
Selects the pointer shape.
Size
Changes the pointer size.
Alignment
Align the remote control’s direction with the pointer on your TV
screen by shaking the remote control left and right. Then, the pointer
automatically moves to the center of the screen.
Sets the DivX and DLNA option.
Option
DivX VOD
Registration
Registers your TV to play DivX protected videos. (See p.71)
DivX Deregistration
Deregisters your TV. (See p.71)
DMR
Activates or deactivates the DMR (Digital Media Render) connection.
This function allow users to choose between MHEG (Digital Teletext) and Teletext if both
exist at the same time.
If only one of them exists, either MHEG or Teletext is enabled regardless of which option you
selected.
Factory Reset
Resets the TV to factory default and erases all stored programmes.
Customizes the TV settings to suit your preference. The factory reset screen will appear
when you turn on the TV for the first time.
ENGLISH
ENG
Data Service
(Only in Ireland)
NOTE
In Lock System “On”, if you forget your password, press ‘0’, ‘3’, ‘2’, ‘5’ on
yy
the remote control handset.
Set ID
Adds an ID to the connected devices
Mode Setting
Default selection is “Home Use”. We recommend setting the TV to “Home Use” mode for the
best picture in your home environment.
Option
Home Use
Selects it for the home environment.
Store Demo
Selects it for the retail environment.
Demo Mode
Sets to show special features of the TV.
You can cancel the demo mode by pressing any buttons except the
Volume and Mute buttons.
NOTE
It is not possible to use Demo Mode in Home Use
yy
mode.
yyIn Store Demo, Demo Mode is automatically set to On.
yyOnce Demo Mode is set to Off in Store Demo, Demo
Mode does not run and only the screen is reset.
The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in
yy
Demo Mode.
MHP Auto start
(Only Italy)
(Depending on model)
This menu is enabled only in Italy and MHP services of the other contries may not work
properly.
This function is Auto Start function of MHP, Italian data broadcast.
Use in channel with MHP signal.
Data broadcast function may not be smooth due to situation from the broadcasting station.
IR Blaster
(Depending on model)
Adjusts when connecting Wireless media box (sold seperate).
For futher information, refer to the "Wireless media box" manual for operating inssturctions.
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
NETWORK Settings
NETWORK
Move
OK
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
• Network Setting
: Wired
• Network Status
: Internet is connected
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
• Smart TV Setting
OK.
113
Exit
• Legal Notice
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to NETWORK and
press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available network settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
Network Setting
Configure the network settings. (See p.46)
Network Status
Display the network status. (See p.52)
Smart TV Setting
Set the region for which weather forecast is provided and manage the IDs added to the TV.
Legal Notice
Country Setting
Set the country for premium services. Different premium services
are provided depending on the country you set.
Weather Effect
Sets the region for the weather to be displayed on the background
of the premium service.
Select your region.
Premium Version
Display the version of the premium service.
ID Management
Manage the login history of the IDs added to the TV.
Reset
Delete all IDs added on the TV.
Display the Legal notice. (See p.54)
ENGLISH
ENG
Setting
114
CUSTOMIZING SETTINGS
SUPPORT Settings
SUPPORT
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
• Software Update
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP and press
• Sound Test
OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SUPPORT and
Move
OK
Exit
• Picture Test
• Signal Test
• Product/Service Info.
• Initialization of Premium
press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to the setting or option
you want and press OK.
- To return to the previous level, press BACK.
5 When you are finished, press EXIT.
The available support settings are described in the following:
Setting
Description
ENGLISH
ENG
Software Update
Update the TV with the latest firmware.
Picture Test
Sound Test
Executes picture or built-in melody sound tests.
»yIf this test has an error, select Yes. You will see product or service information.
»yIf this test has no errors, check the connection status of external devices and refer to the
manual of external devices.
Signal Test
Shows the MUX and Service information etc.
NOTE
yyThis displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX.
yyThis displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX.(*MUX:
A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple
channels.))
yyIf you select Satellite as the auto tuning input source, a signal test is not displayed. If
you select Antenna & Satellite or Cable & Satellite, a signal test only for Antenna
or Cable is displayed.
Product/Service
Info.
Shows the product or service information.
Customer Service Center can differ by country.
Initialization of
Premium
Initialize the premium menu if an error occurs while updating the premium menu.
Then, the TV automatically switches off and then back on.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
115
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connect various external devices to the TV and switch input modes to select an external device. For more
information on external device’s connection, refer to the manual provided with each device.
Available external devices are: HD receivers, DVD players, VCRs, audio systems, USB storage devices,
PC, gaming devices, and other external devices.
NOTE
If you record a TV programme on a DVD recorder or VCR, make sure to connect the TV
yy
signal input cable to the TV through a DVD recorder or VCR. For more information on
recording, refer to the manual provided with the connected device.
The external device connection may differ from the model.
yy
Connect external devices to the TV regardless of the order of the TV port.
yy
ENGLISH
ENG
116
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connection Overview
Connect various external devices to the ports on the TV back panel.
1 Find an external device you want to connect to your TV as shown on the following illustration.
2 Check the connection type of the external device.
3 Go to the appropriate illustration and check the connection details.
HD Receiver
HDMI – See p.117
DVI – See p.117
Component – See p.118
Composite – See p.119
ENGLISH
ENG
Speaker
Digital – See p.122
PC
HDMI – See p.120
DVI – See p.120
RGB – See p.121
DVD
VCR
HDMI – See p.117
DVI – See p.117
Component – See p.118
Composite – See p.119
Euro Scart – See p.118
Composite – See p.119
Euro Scart – See p.118
USB
Memory storage –
See p.123
Memory card reader
– See p.123
Gaming device
HDMI – See p.117
Component – See p.118
Composite – See p.119
NOTE
If you connect a gaming device to the TV, use the cable supplied with the gaming device.
yy
Refer to the external equipment's manual for operating instructions.
yy
MAKING CONNECTIONS
This section on MAKING CONNECTIONS
yy
mainly uses diagrams for the
32/37/42/47LV37** models.
Image shown may differ from your TV.
yy
Connecting to a HD receiver,
DVD, or VCR player
117
DVI to HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video signal from an external
device to the TV. Connect the external device and
the TV with the DVI-HDMI cable as shown in the
following illustration. To transmit an audio signal,
connect an audio cable.
Connect a HD receiver, DVD, or VCR player to the
TV and select an appropriate input mode.
HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video and audio signals from
an external device to the TV. Connect the external
device and the TV with the HDMI cable as shown
in the following illustration.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
Use the latest High Speed HDMI™ Cable
yy
with CEC (Customer Electronics Control)
function.
High Speed HDMI™ Cables are tested
yy
to carry an HD signal up to 1080p and
higher.
118
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Component Connection
Euro Scart Connection
Transmits the analogue video and audio signals
from an external device to the TV. Connect the
external device and the TV with the component
cable as shown in the following illustration.
Transmits the video and audio signals from an
external device to the TV set. Connect the external
device and the TV set with the Euro Scart cable as
shown on the following illustration. To display images by using progressive scan, make sure to use
the Euro Scart cable.
ENGLISH
ENG
Output Type
NOTE
yy
If cables are installed incorrectly, it could
case the image to display in black and
white or with distorted colour. Check to
ensure the cable are matched with the
corresponding colour connection.
AV1
AV1
(TV Out )
(When DTV scheduled
recording is in progress
using recording equipment.)
Digital TV
Digital TV
O
Analogue TV, AV
Analogue TV
O
Component/RGB
(The input mode is
Analogue TV converted to DTV.)
Current
input mode
HDMI
1
X
X
1 TV Out : Outputs Analogue TV or Digital TV
signals.
NOTE
Any Euro scart cable used must be
yy
signal shielded.
When watching digital TV in 3D imaging
yy
mode, monitor out signals cannot be
output through the SCART cable. (Only
3D models)
If you set the 3D mode to On while a
yy
scheduled recording is performed on
digital TV, monitor out signals cannot
be output through the SCART cable,
and the recording cannot be performed.
(Only 3D models)
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Composite Connection
Transmits the analogue video and audio signals
from an external device to the TV. Connect the
external device and the TV with the composite
cable as shown in the following illustration.
119
Connecting to a PC
NOTE
yy
It is recommended to use the TV set with
the HDMI connection for the best image
quality.
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
If you have a mono VCR, connect the
yy
audio cable from the VCR to the AUDIO
L/MONO jack of the TV.
120
MAKING CONNECTIONS
HDMI Connection
DVI to HDMI Connection
Transmits the digital video and audio signals from
your PC to the TV. Connect the PC and the TV
with the HDMI cable as shown in the following
illustrations.
Transmits the digital video signal from your PC to
the TV. Connect the PC and the TV with the DVIHDMI cable as shown in the following illustration.
To transmit an audio signal, connect an audio
cable.
ENGLISH
ENG
MAKING CONNECTIONS
RGB Connection
Transmits the analogue video signal from your
PC to the TV. Connect the PC and the TV with the
supplied D-sub 15 pin signal cable as shown in the
following illustrations. To transmit an audio signal,
connect an audio cable.
121
NOTE
ENGLISH
ENG
There may be interference relating to
yy
resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or
brightness in PC mode. Change the PC
mode to another resolution or change the
refresh rate to another rate or adjust the
brightness and contrast on the menu until the
picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the PC
graphic card can not be changed, change the
PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer
of the PC graphic card.
The synchronization input waveform for
yy
Horizontal and Vertical frequencies are
separate.
We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz for
yy
the PC mode, this should provide the best
picture quality.
Connect the signal cable from the monitor
yy
output port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port
of the TV or the signal cable from the HDMI
output port of the PC to the HDMI IN (or
HDMI/DVI IN) port on the TV.
Connect the audio cable from the PC to the
yy
Audio input on the TV. (Audio cables are not
included with the TV).
If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as
yy
required.
If the graphic card on the PC does not output
yy
analogue and digital RGB simultaneously,
connect only one of either RGB or HDMI IN
(or HDMI/DVI IN) to display the PC output on
the TV.
DOS mode may not work depending on the
yy
video card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable.
If you use too long an RGB-PC cable, there
yy
may be interference on the screen. We
recommend using under 5m of cable. This
provides the best picture quality.
122
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting to an Audio
System
Connecting to Headphone
Connection
Use an external audio system instead of the builtin speaker.
(Depending on model)
NOTE
Listen to the sound through a headphone.
If you use an external audio device instead
yy
of the built-in speaker, set the TV speaker
feature to off. (See p.105)
Digital Optical Audio Connection
Transmits the digital audio signal from the TV to an
external device. Connect the external device and
the TV with the optical audio cable as shown in the
following illustration.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
CAUTION
yy
Do not look into the optical output port.
Looking at the laser beam may damage your
vision.
AUDIO menu items are disabled when
yy
connecting a headphone.
When changing AV MODE with a
yy
headphone connected, the change is
applied to video but not to audio.
Optical Digital Audio Out is not available
yy
when connecting a headphone.
Headphone impedance: 16
yy
Max audio output of headphone: 10 mW
yy
to 15 mW
Headphone jack size: 0.35 cm
yy
MAKING CONNECTIONS
123
Connecting to a USB
Connecting to a CI Module
Connect a USB storage device such as s USB
flash memory, external hard drive or a USB
memory card reader to the TV and access the
Smart Share menu to use various multimedia files.
See “Connecting USB storage devices” and see
“Browsing files”.
View the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV
mode. This feature is not available in all countries.
(See p.41).
or
Check this point as shown
and insert the CI Module.
Check if the CI module is inserted into the
yy
PCMCIA card slot in the right direction. If
the module is not inserted properly, this can
cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA
card slot.
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
124
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Connecting the Wireless
Media Box
(Depending on model)
LG TVs with a Wireless Control port support the
LG Wireless Media Box, which is sold separately.
When you connect the Wireless Ready Dongle
(included with the Wireless Media Box) to the
TV, external devices can be connected to the LG
Wireless Media Box and video and audio will be
sent to the TV wirelessly.
SIMPLINK Connection
Play and control the AV device connected with
the HDMI cable through HDMI-CEC. This TV may
work with the devices that support HDMI-CEC, but
only devices with the
logo are fully supported.
Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI/
DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal on the rear of the TV
and the other end to the SIMPLINK device.
Refer to the Wireless Media Box manual for
operating instructions.
NOTE
LG Wireless
Media Box
ENGLISH
ENG
NOTE
When using the external device connected
yy
to the Wireless Media Box, some functions
of the TV menu may not work.
If the connected device does not support
yy
HDMI-CEC, the SIMPLINK feature is
unavailable.
To operate SIMPLINK, an High Speed
yy
HDMI Cable with *CEC function should
be used. (*CEC: Consumer Electronics
Control).
SIMPLINK may not work properly if you a
yy
third-party device that has an HDMI-CEC
function.
In wireless external output, SIMPLINK
yy
function is not supported.
MAKING CONNECTIONS
Activating and Using the
SIMPLINK menus
1 Press INPUT to access the input sources.
2 Press Red button to access the SIMPLINK
menus.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to select to On.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to one of
the devices and press OK.
◄
►
On
Watch TV
◀ DISC 1
▶
1
2
◀ VCR 1
▶
3
HDD/DVD-R
HD HT
HDD Recorder
◀ Speaker
TV Speaker
INPUT
▶
5
Exit
Description
1
Displays the previously viewed TV channel.
2
Plays discs. When multiple discs are available,
the title of the disc appears at the bottom of the
screen.
3
Controls the connected VCR.
4
HDD recordings playback: Controls the recording
stored in HDD.
5
Audio out to home theatre speaker or Audio out
to TV: Changes the audio output between Home
theatre speaker and TV speaker.
- A check mark appears in front of the selected
device.
- Available devices display in a bright colour.
- Unavailable devices display in grey.
5 Control the selected AV device.
- Direct Play: After connecting AV devices to
the TV, you can directly control the devices
and play media without additional settings.
- Select AV device: Enables you to select one
of the AV devices connected to the TV.
- Disc playback: Control connected AV devices by pressing the Navigation buttons, OK,
, , , and .
- Power off all devices: When you power off
the TV, all connected devices are turned off.
- Switch audio-out: Offers an easy way to
switch audio-out.
- Sync Power on: When the equipment with
SIMPLINK function connected HDMI terminal
starts to play, The TV will automatically turn
on.
NOTE
If you change the input source by
yy
pressing INPUT, the progressing function
of the SIMPLINK device will stop.
If you select a device that has the
yy
home theatre feature, the sound output
automatically switches to the home
theatre speaker and the TV speaker turns
off.
If a connected SIMPLINK home theatre
yy
system does not play the audio from the
TV, connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
terminal on the rear of the TV to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IN terminal on the back
of the SIMPLINK device with an optical
cable.
ENGLISH
ENG
No.
4
125
126
TELETEXT
TELETEXT
yy
This feature is not available in all countries.
Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV
stations which gives up-to-the-minute information
on news, weather, television programmes, share
prices and many other topics.
The teletext decoder of this TV can support the
SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT systems. SIMPLE
(standard teletext) consists of a number of pages
which are selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and FASTEXT are
more modern methods allowing quick and easy
selection of teletext information.
Switch On/Off
ENGLISH
ENG
Press the TEXT button to switch to teletext. The
initial page or last page viewed appears on the
screen.
Two page numbers, TV station name, date and
time are displayed on the screen headline. The
first page number indicates your selection, while
the second shows the current page displayed.
Press the TEXT button to switch off teletext. The
previous mode reappears.
Simple Text
Page selection
1 Enter the desired page number as a three digit
number with the NUMBER buttons. If during
selection you press a wrong number, you must
complete the three digit number and then reenter the correct page number.
2 The P
button can be used to select the
preceding or following page.
Top Text
The user guide displays four fields-red, green,
yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The
yellow field denotes the next group and the blue
field indicates the next block.
Block / Group / Page Selection
1 With Blue button you can progress from block
to block.
2 Use Yellow button to proceed to the next group
with automatic overflow to the next block.
3 With Green button you can proceed to the next
existing page with automatic overflow to the
next group.
4 Alternatively, the P
button can be used. The
red button returns to the previous selection.
Alternatively the P button can be used.
Direct Page Selection
s with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a
A
page by entering it as a three digit number using
the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode.
TELETEXT
Fastext
127
Time
The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the
corresponding coloured button.
Page selection
1 Press the T.OPT button and then use the Navigation button to select
index page.
menu. Display the
When viewing a TV programme, select this
menu to display the time at the top right hand
corner of the screen.
In the teletext mode, press this button to select
a sub page number. The sub page number is
displayed at the bottom of the screen. To hold
or change the sub page, press the Red button,
Green button,
or NUMBER buttons.
2 You can select the pages which are colour
coded along the bottom line with corresponding
coloured buttons.
3 AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select
a page by entering its three digit page number
with the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode.
4 The P
button can be used to select the
preceding or following page.
Press the T. OPT button and then use the Navigation button to select the Text Option menu.
Stops the automatic page change which will
occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more
sub pages. The number of sub pages and the
sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the
screen below the time. When this menu is
selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top
left-hand corner of the screen and the automatic page change is inactive.
Reveal
Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles.
Update
Text Option
Index
Time
Hold
Reveal
Update
Close
Index
Select the each index page.
Displays the TV picture on the screen while
waiting for a new teletext page. The display
will appear at the top left hand corner of the
screen. When the updated page is available
then display will change to the page number.
Select this menu again to view the updated
teletext page.
NOTE
In UK(In digital mode), T. OPT button does
yy
not work.
ENGLISH
ENG
Special Teletext Function
Hold
128
DIGITAL TELETEXT
DIGITAL TELETEXT
Teletext in digital service
yy
This function works in UK, Ireland only.
The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is
greatly improved in various aspects such as text,
graphics etc.
This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast digital teletext.
Teletext within digital service
1 Press the numeric or P
button to select a
certain service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2 Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on
ENGLISH
ENG
teletext.
3 Follow the indications on digital teletext and
move onto the next step by pressing OK, Navigation button, Red button, Green button, Yellow
button, Blue button or NUMBER buttons and
so on.
4 Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off
1 Press the numeric or P
button to select a
digital service which broadcasts digital teletext.
2 Follow the indications on digital teletext and
move onto the next step by pressing TEXT,
OK, Navigation button, Red button, Green
button, Yellow button, Blue button or NUMBER
buttons and etc..
3 To change digital teletext service, select a different service by the numeric or P
button.
digital teletext and return to TV viewing.
Some services may allow you to access text
services by pressing Red button.
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE
Update and clean your TV regularly to keep the
best performance and to extend the product
lifespan.
Updating the TV Firmware
Download and install the latest firmware by connecting to the firmware update server or broadcasting OTA service to enhance or change the
product function, or add new features.
The firmware update may not work properly depending on the Internet environment or DTV signal
strength. If so, you may obtain the latest firmware
update from the authorized LG Electronics service
center.
To check the current firmware version or update
the firmware,
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SUPPORT
and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Software
NOTE
yy
While updating the firmware, do not disconnect the LAN cable, turn the TV off, or
unplug the power cord.
yy
If you change the channel during the
firmware update via OTA, the update
stops. The process resumes when you
go back to the original programme. The
update continues even when the power
is switched off using the remote control.
In this case, it is normal that the colour
of the power indicator may change and a
dim light may be displayed on the screen.
The system operates normally once the
update is complete.
yy
Premium service is disabled while the
software is being updated through NSU.
yy
You can check the software update status in the Software Update menu or from
the update information displayed under
the channel banner.
yy
Linkage update service (Only Nordic
models) : You can check whether LG
OTA service is available in the DTV channel by pressing this button on the Magic
Motion remote control or the red button
as you see the "Update is detected."
message under the channel banner.
Update and press OK.
The current firmware version displays.
5 Select Check Update Version to check a new
firmware version manually.
Software Update ◀
On
▶
• Current Version
01.00.09
Check Update Version
Close
If selecting Software Update - On, the TV
finds a new firmware through the NSU*/OTA*
and the update pop-up window will appear on
the screen.
* NSU (Network Software Update): If the TV is
connected to the internet, the TV finds a new
firmware uploaded on the LG server.
* OTA(Over The Air): If watching the digital
broadcasting system, the TV is transmitted
new firmware thorugh DTV signal.
6 When the update is complete, the TV will automatically restart in 5 seconds.
You may need to reset some SETUP, PICTURE, or AUDIO menus.
NOTE
yy
You cannot downgrade back to an older
firmware version.
yy
The period of time for the firmware update may be different depending on the
firmware size, network condition or DTV
signal strength.
yy
If the firmware update download fails
when using wireless, temporarily connect
a cable directly to your router. If it still
does not download, contact customer
service.
ENGLISH
ENG
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to SETUP
129
130
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning Your TV
CAUTION
yy
Make sure to turn the power off and disconnect the power cord and all other cables first.
yy
When the TV is left unattended and unused
for a long time, disconnect the power cord
from the wall outlet to prevent possible damage from lightning or power surges.
Screen and frame
To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the surface with a
dry, clean, and soft cloth.
To remove major dirt, wipe the surface with a soft
cloth dampened in clean water or a diluted mild
detergent. Then wipe immediately with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
ENGLISH
ENG
yy
Do not push, rub, or hit the surface with
your fingernail or a sharp object, as this may
result in scratches on the screen and image
distortions.
yy
Do not use any chemicals, such as waxes,
benzene, alcohol, thinners, insecticides, air
fresheners, lubricants, as these may damage
the screen’s finish and cause discoloration.
Cabinet and stand
To remove dust or light dirt, wipe the cabinet with a
dry, clean, and soft cloth.
To remove major dirt, wipe the cabinet with a soft
cloth dampened in a clean water or water containing a small amount of mild detergent. Then wipe
immediately with a dry cloth.
CAUTION
yy
Do not spray liquid onto the surface. If water
enters the TV, it may result in fire, electric
shock, or malfunction.
yy
Do not use any chemicals as this may deteriorate the surface.
Power cord
Remove the accumulated dust or dirt on the power
cord regularly.
MAINTENANCE
131
Preventing “Image burn”
or “Burn-in” on your TV
screen
yy
If a fixed image displays on the TV screen for a
long period of time, it will be imprinted and become a permanent disfigurement on the screen.
This is “image burn” or “burn-in” and not covered
by the warranty.
yy
If the aspect ratio of the TV is set to 4:3 for a
long period of time, image burn may occur on
the letterboxed area of the screen.
yy
Avoid displaying a fixed image on the TV screen
for a long period of time (2 or more hours for
LCD, 1 or more hours for the Plasma TV) to
prevent image burn.
ENGLISH
ENG
132
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING
General
Problem
Resolution
Cannot control the TV with the
remote control.
yyCheck the remote control sensor on the product and try again.
yyCheck if there is any obstacle between the product and the remote control.
yyCheck if the batteries are still working and properly installed ( to ,
to ).
yyCheck if the appropriate input mode such as TV or VCR is set for using the
remote control.
No image display and no sound is
produced.
yyCheck if the product is turned on.
yyCheck if the power cord is connected to a wall outlet.
yyCheck if there is a problem in the wall outlet by connecting other products.
Image appears slowly when the TV
turns on.
yyThe image is muted during the product start up process. This is normal. If the
image does not appear in a few minutes, unplug the TV for 30 seconds and try
again. If the image still does not appear, contact the authorized service centre
in your local area.
Cannot connect external devices.
yyRefer to the “Connection overview” and connect an external device.
The TV turns off suddenly.
yyCheck the power control settings. The power supply may be interrupted.
yyCheck if the Auto sleep feature is activated in the Time settings.
Refer to the “Sleep Timer”.
yyIf there is no signal while the TV is on, the TV will turn off automatically after 15
minutes of inactivity.
ENGLISH
ENG
Audio
Problem
Resolution
No sound is produced while images yyPress
+ or - button.
are displaying.
yyCheck if the sound is muted by pressing MUTE.
yyScroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
yyCheck if the audio cables are connected properly.
yyCheck if the TV Speaker feature is activated in the menu option.
No output from one of the speakers
yyAdjust Balance in the menu option.
Unusual sound from inside the TV
is produced.
yyA change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise
when the product turns on or off. There is no problem with your product.
TROUBLESHOOTING
133
Video
Problem
Resolution
An image displays in black and
white or the colour quality is poor.
yyAdjust the colour setting in the menu option.
yyKeep a sufficient distance between this product and other electronic products.
yyScroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
Horizontal or vertical bars appears
or images blur
yyCheck if there is local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
Lines or streaks appear on images
yyCheck the antenna or aim the antenna to the correct direction.
Afterimages (ghosts) appear when
the product turns off
yyPixels may have been damaged from a fixed image displayed for a long time
(image burn). Use a screen saver to prevent the pixel damage on the screen.
The power is on but the screen appears extremely dark.
yyAdjust the brightness and contrast in the menu option.
“No Signal” appears on the screen.
yyCheck if the signal cable is connected between the TV and products properly.
yyCheck the selected input source by pressing INPUT.
Black spots appear on the screen.
yySeveral pixels in red, green, white, or black may appear on the screen that can
attribute to the characteristics of the panel.
This is normal.
The display offset is wrong.
yyAdjust the position setting in the menu option.
yyCheck if the video card resolution and frequency are supported by the product.
If the frequency is out of range, set to the recommended resolution using the
display settings on the external device.
Thin lines appear in the background yyCheck the video cable connections.
of the screen.
Horizontal noises appear or charac- yyAdjust the Phase setting in the menu option.
ters blur.
Refer to the “SCREEN”.
yyScroll to other channels. There may a problem with the broadcast.
yyThe station signal may be weak. Aim the antenna to the correct direction.
yyCheck if there is local interference such as an electrical appliance or power
tool.
ENGLISH
ENG
The reception on some channels
is poor
134
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
32LV37**
With stand
32LV3700-ZA / 32LV3700-ZC
32LV370S-ZB / 32LV3701-ZC
32LV3750-ZA / 32LV3750-ZC
32LV375G-ZC / 32LV375S-ZB
32LV375S-ZC / 32LV375T-ZA
32LV375T-ZC / 32LV375W-ZC
764.0 mm x 545.0 mm x 240.0 mm
37LV3700-ZA / 37LV3700-ZC
37LV370S-ZB / 37LV3701-ZC
37LV3750-ZA / 37LV3750-ZC
37LV375G-ZC / 37LV375S-ZB
37LV375S-ZC / 37LV375T-ZA
37LV375T-ZC / 37LV375W-ZC
888.0 mm x 614.0 mm x 240.0 mm
Without stand
764.0 mm x 484.0 mm x 35.4 mm
888.0 mm x 553.0 mm x 35.4 mm
With stand
11.4 kg
13.1 kg
Without stand
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
37LV37**
9.6 kg
11.3 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
80 W
100 W
42LV37**
47LV37**
With stand
42LV3700-ZA / 42LV3700-ZC
42LV370S-ZB / 42LV3701-ZC
42LV3750-ZA / 42LV3750-ZC
42LV375G-ZC / 42LV375S-ZB
42LV375S-ZC / 42LV375T-ZA
42LV375T-ZC / 42LV375W-ZC
998.0 mm x 684.0 mm x 256.0 mm
47LV3700-ZA / 47LV3700-ZC
47LV370S-ZB / 47LV3701-ZC
47LV3750-ZA / 47LV3750-ZC
47LV375G-ZC / 47LV375S-ZB
47LV375S-ZC / 47LV375T-ZA
47LV375T-ZC / 47LV375W-ZC
1108.0 mm x 746.0 mm x 256.0 mm
Without stand
998.0 mm x 615.0 mm x 30.4 mm
1108.0 mm x 677.0 mm x 30.4 mm
With stand
15.5 kg
20.9 kg
Without stand
13.3 kg
18.7 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
110 W
140 W
MODELS
ENGLISH
ENG
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
135
32LV47**
37LV47**
32LV470S-ZC
37LV470S-ZC
With stand
772.0 mm x 549.0 mm x 240.0 mm
893.0 mm x 618.0 mm x 240.0 mm
Without stand
772.0 mm x 490.0 mm x 34.9 mm
893.0 mm x 558.0 mm x 34.9 mm
With stand
10.9 kg
12.4 kg
Without stand
9.1 kg
10.6 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
100 W
110 W
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
MODELS
42LV47**
47LV47**
42LV470S-ZC
47LV470S-ZC
With stand
1005.0 mm x 688.0 mm x 256.0 mm 1115.0 mm x 750.0 mm x 256.0 mm
Without stand
1005.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 29.9 mm
1115.0 mm x 683.0 mm x 29.9 mm
With stand
15.2 kg
20.7 kg
Without stand
13.0 kg
18.5 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
130 W
140 W
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
ENGLISH
ENG
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
136
SPECIFICATIONS
32LW47**
42LW47**
32LW470S-ZB
42LW470S-ZB
With stand
772.0 mm x 551.0 mm x 240.0 mm
1005.0 mm x 686.0 mm x 255.0 mm
Without stand
772.0 mm x 490.0 mm x 34.9 mm
1005.0 mm x 621.0 mm x 29.9 mm
With stand
10.5 kg
15.9 kg
Without stand
8.2 kg
13.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
100 W
130 W
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
MODELS
47LW47**
55LW47**
47LW470S-ZB
55LW470S-ZB
With stand
1115.0 mm x 748.0 mm x 255.0 mm 1293.0 mm x 851.0 mm x 341.0 mm
Without stand
1115.0 mm x 683.0 mm x 29.9 mm
1293.0 mm x 785.0 mm x 29.9 mm
With stand
21.4 kg
27.0 kg
Without stand
18.5 kg
22.0 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
140 W
160 W
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
ENGLISH
ENG
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
SPECIFICATIONS
47LK95**
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
137
47LK950S-ZA
With stand
1137.0 mm x 758.0 mm x 270.0 mm
Without stand
1137.0 mm x 685.0 mm x 76.8 mm
With stand
20.3 kg
Without stand
18.3 kg
Power requirement
AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz
Power consumption
250 W
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
ENGLISH
ENG
138
SPECIFICATIONS
50PZ57**
With stand
50PZ570-ZB / 50PZ570G-ZB
50PZ570S-ZB / 50PZ570T-ZB
50PZ570W-ZB / 50PZ575S-ZB
1172.3 mm x 770.9 mm x 289.8 mm
60PZ570-ZB / 60PZ570G-ZB
60PZ570S-ZB / 60PZ570T-ZB
60PZ570W-ZB / 60PZ575S-ZB
1391.1 mm x 905.2 mm x 334.7 mm
Without stand
1172.3 mm x 712.2 mm x 52.5 mm
1391.1 mm x 835.5 mm x 52.5 mm
With stand
29.8 kg
42.6 kg
Without stand
27.5 kg
38.5 kg
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
60PZ57**
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
ENGLISH
ENG
SPECIFICATIONS
50PZ75**
Weight
60PZ75**
With stand
50PZ750-ZA / 50PZ750G-ZA
50PZ750S-ZA / 50PZ750T-ZA
50PZ750W-ZA / 50PZ755S-ZA
1185.2 mm x 782.6 mm x 317.2 mm
60PZ750-ZA / 60PZ750G-ZA
60PZ750S-ZA / 60PZ750T-ZA
60PZ750W-ZA / 60PZ755S-ZA
1404.0 mm x 911.4 mm x 364.4 mm
Without stand
1185.2 mm x 714.0 mm x 49.6 mm
1404.0 mm x 837.8 mm x 49.6 mm
With stand
31.5 kg
46.3 kg
Without stand
27.9 kg
40.3 kg
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
139
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
ENGLISH
ENG
140
SPECIFICATIONS
50PZ95**
With stand
50PZ950-ZA / 50PZ950G-ZA
50PZ950S-ZA / 50PZ950T-ZA
50PZ950W-ZA / 50PZ955S-ZA
1175.2 mm x 787.6 mm x 317.2 mm
60PZ950-ZA / 60PZ950G-ZA
60PZ950S-ZA / 60PZ950T-ZA
60PZ950W-ZA / 60PZ955S-ZA
1393.4 mm x 916.4 mm x 364.4 mm
Without stand
1175.2 mm x 720.6 mm x 49.6 mm
1393.4 mm x 843.8 mm x 49.6 mm
With stand
32.5 kg
46.3 kg
Without stand
28.9 kg
40.3 kg
MODELS
Dimensions
(W x H x D)
Weight
60PZ95**
Product specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice due to upgrade of product
functions.
For the power supply and power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.
ENGLISH
ENG
CI Module Size
(W x H x D)
100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm
Operating Temperature
0 °C to 40 °C
Less than 80 %
Environment Operating Humidity
condition
Storage Temperature
-20 °C to 60 °C
Storage Humidity
Television System
Less than 85 %
Satellite Digital TV1 Digital TV2
DVB-T
DVB-T/T2
DVB-C
DVB-C
DVB-S/S2
Programme Coverage
VHF, UHF
C-Band, Ku-Band
Maximum number of
storable programmes
6,000
External Antenna
Impedance
1 Only satellite models
2 Only DVB-T2 support models
3 Except for DVB-T2 support models
Digital TV
Analogue TV
DVB-T
DVB-C
PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II,
SECAM L/L’3
VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69,
CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47
VHF, UHF
1,200
75 Ω
SPECIFICATIONS
RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC supported mode
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
720x400
31.468
70.08
640x480
31.469
59.94
800x600
37.879
60.31
1024x768
48.363
60.00
1360x768
47.72
59.80
63.981
60.02
66.587
59.93
67.5
60.00
1280x1024
(HDMI-PC)
1920x1080
(RGB-PC)
1920x1080
(HDMI-PC)
Resolution
720x480
720x576
1280x720
1920x1080
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
31.469
31.5
31.25
37.5
44.96
45
33.72
33.75
28.125
26.97
27
33.716
33.75
56.25
67.43
67.5
59.94
60
50
50
59.94
60
59.94
60
50
23.97
24
29.976
30.00
50
59.94
60
Component port connecting information
Component ports on the
TV
Video output ports
on DVD player
Y
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
Y
B-Y
R-Y
Y
Cb
Cr
Y
Pb
Pr
Signal
Component
HDMI
480i/576i
O
X
480p/576p
O
O
720p/1080i
O
O
1080p
O
(50 Hz / 60 Hz only)
O
(24 Hz / 30 Hz /
50 Hz / 60 Hz)
ENGLISH
ENG
HDMI/DVI-DTV supported mode
141
142
SPECIFICATIONS
Supported DivX file
File
Audio/
Extensions Video
.asf
.wmv
Video
Audio
Codec
Profile/Level Support
VC-1 Advanced Profile
Advanced Profile@Level 3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
VC-1 Simple and Main
Profiles
Simple Profile@Medium Level (e.g.
CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level (e.g.
1080p30)
Explanation
Only streams compliant to
SMPTE 421M VC-1 standard are supported.
WMA Standard
WMA 9 Professional
DivX3.11
Video
.divx
.avi
ENGLISH
ENG
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-4 Part 2
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
Audio
MP3
Video
H.264 / AVC
Audio
Audio
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Global motion compensation or quarterpel motion
estimation does not supported. Streams using this
syntax are not supported.
Most of the MKV content
available is encoded by the
open source x264 codec.
MP3
Dolby Digital
H.264 / AVC
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
MPEG-2
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
VC-1
Simple Profile@Medium Level
(e.g. CIF, QVGA)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 1080p30)
Advanced Profile@Level3
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Video
.ts
.trp
.tp
Main Profile@ Level 4.1
High Profile@ Level 4.1
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60, 1080p30)
Global motion compensation or quarterpel motion
estimation does not supported. Streams using this
syntax are not supported.
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
Video
.mkv
Advanced Simple Profile
(e.g. 720p/1080i)
XViD
H.264 / AVC
Audio
.mp4
.m4v
.mov
DivX4
DivX5
DivX6
Only streams compliant to
SMPTE 421M VC-1 standard are supported.
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
MPEG-1 Layer III (MP3)
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital Plus
MP3
MPEG-1
Video
.vob
.mpg
MPEG-2
Audio
Dolby Digital
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
DVD-LPCM
Video
MPEG-1
Audio
MPEG-1 Layer I, II
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Main Profile@High Level
(e.g. 720p60, 1080i60)
Only streams compliant
configured properly for TS,
PS or ES
SPECIFICATIONS
143
3D supported mode
Input
Signal
720p
Resolution
Horizontal
Frequency (kHz)
Vertical
Frequency (Hz)
Playable 3D video format
45
60
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
89.9/90
59.94/60
HDMI 3D Frame Packing
(Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
90
60
HDMI 3D Frame Packing
(Only Plasma TV)
50
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
1280X720
37.5
75
1080i
1920X1080
HDMI
1080p
HDMI 3D Frame Packing
60
28.125
50
67.50
60
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
Single Frame Sequential
56.250
50
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
Single Frame Sequential
27
24
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
HDMI 3D Top & Bottom
54
24
HDMI 3D Frame Packing
(Only Plasma TV)
33.75
30
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
53.95/54
23.98/24
67.50
30
HDMI 3D Frame Packing
(Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
66.587
59.934
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
50
60
50
60
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
1920X1080
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
HDMI 3D Side by Side(Half)
RGB
1080p
1920X1080
Component
(Only
Plasma TV)
720p
1280X720
1080i
1920X1080
37.5
45
28.125
33.75
USB
1080p
1920X1080
33.75
30
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
MPO(Photo)
DLNA
1080p
1920X1080
33.75
30
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
Checker Board
DTV
Signal
Playable 3D video format
720p, 1080i
Side by Side
Top & Bottom
(Only 32/42/47/55LW47**, 47LK95**)
yyMedia contents and a player need to support HDMI 3D Frame Packing, HDMI 3D Side by Side, HDMI 3D
Top & Bottom to play in 3D.
yyVideo, which is input as HDMI 3D Frame Packing, HDMI 3D Side by Side, HDMI 3D Top & Bottom format,
is switched into the 3D screen automatically.
(Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**)
yyMedia contents and a player need to support HDMI 3D Frame Packing, HDMI 3D Side by Side, HDMI 3D
Top & Bottom to play in 3D.
yyVideo, which is input as HDMI 3D Frame Packing format, is switched into the 3D screen automatically.
yy2D->3D mode is available to watch for all signals.
ENGLISH
ENG
33.75
144
SPECIFICATIONS
RF module(BM-LDS201) specification
(Only 50/60PZ57**, 50/60PZ75**, 50/60PZ95**)
For TV by using a 2.4 GHz bandwidth radio frequency (RF).
yy
Output: 1 dBm or lower
yy
Maximum Communication Distance: 10 m in an open space
yy
Bandwidth: 2.4 GHz (2.4035 GHz to 2.4783 GHz)
yy
Transfer Rate: 250 kbps
yy
FCC ID of RF module inside TV
FCC ID : BEJLDS201
ENGLISH
ENG
IR CODES
145
IR CODES
(Depending on model)
Code
(Hexa)
Function
Note
Code
(Hexa)
Function
Note
POWER
Remote control Button
(Power On/Off)
44
OK
Remote control Button
95
ENERGY
SAVING
Remote control Button
28
BACK
Remote control Button
30
AV MODE
Remote control Button
AB
GUIDE
Remote control Button
0B
INPUT
Remote control Button
5B
EXIT
Remote control Button
F0
TV/RAD
Remote control Button
72
RED
Remote control Button
Alphanumeric
buttons 0-9
Remote control Button
71
GREEN
Remote control Button
53
LIST
Remote control Button
63
YELLOW
Remote control Button
1A
Q.VIEW
Remote control Button
61
BLUE
Remote control Button
02
VOL +
Remote control Button
20
TEXT
Remote control Button
03
VOL -
Remote control Button
21
T.OPT(T.Option)
Remote control Button
1E
FAV/MARK/
CHAR/NUM
Remote control Button
39
SUBTITLE
Remote control Button
DC
3D
Remote control Button
B1
09
MUTE/DELETE
Remote control Button
B0
00
P^
Remote control Button
BA
01
Pv
Remote control Button
8E
Remote control Button
59
Premium
Remote control Button
8F
Remote control Button
43
Home
Remote control Button
7E
SIMPLINK
Remote control Button
45
Q.MENU
Remote control Button
79
RATIO
Remote control Button
58
@
Remote control Button
BD
REC
Remote control Button
40
^
Remote control Button
91
AD
Remote control Button
41
v
Remote control Button
AA
INFO
Remote control Button
07
<
Remote control Button
9F
APP/*
Remote control Button
06
>
Remote control Button
10-19
/ LIVE TV
Remote control Button
Remote control Button
(FREEZE)
Remote control Button
ENGLISH
ENG
08
146
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Setup
Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an
external control device (such as a computer or an
A/V control system) to control the product’s functions externally.
Connect the serial port of the control device to the
RS-232C jack on the product back panel.
Type of connector;
D-Sub 9-Pin Male
1
6
NOTE
yy
RS-232C on this TV is intended to be used
with third party RS-232C control hardware
and software. The instructions below are
provided to help with programming software
or to test functionality using telenet software.
yy
RS-232C connection cables are not supplied
with the product.
ENGLISH
ENG
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
5
9
Pin name
No connection
RXD (Receive data)
TXD (Transmit data)
DTR (DTE side ready)
GND
DSR (DCE side ready)
RTS (Ready to send)
CTS (Clear to send)
No Connection
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
RS-232C Configurations
147
Set ID
Set ID number. "Real Data Mapping". (See p.153)
7-Wire Configurations (Standard RS-232C cable)
RXD TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
PC
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
8
7
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DSR
DTR
CTS
RTS
1 Press Home to access the Home menu.
2 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
SETUP and press OK.
3 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to
OPTION and press OK.
4 Press the Navigation buttons to scroll to Set ID
and press OK.
5 Scroll left or right to select a set ID number and
select Close. The adjustment range is 1 to 99.
6 When you are finished, press EXIT.
3-Wire Configurations(Not standard)
RXD TXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
TV
2
3
5
4
6
7
8
3
2
5
6
4
7
8
D-Sub 9
D-Sub 9
TXD
RXD
GND
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
ENGLISH
ENG
PC
148
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
Communication Parameters
yy
Baud rate: 9600 bps (UART)
yy
Data length: 8 bits
yy
Parity : None
yy
Stop bit: 1 bit
yy
Communication code: ASCII code
yy
Use a crossed (reverse) cable.
Command reference list
COMMAND1
COMMAND2
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
COMMAND1
COMMAND2
DATA
(Hexadecimal)
ENGLISH
ENG
01. Power
k
a
00 to 01
14. Bass
k
s
00 to 64
02. Aspect
Ratio
k
c
(See p.150)
15. Balance
k
t
00 to 64
03. Screen
Mute
k
d
(See p.150)
16. Colour
Temperature
x
u
00 to 64
04. Volume
Mute
k
e
00 to 01
17.ISM Method j
p
(See p.152)
05. Volume
Control
k
f
00 to 64
18. Energy
Saving
j
q
00 to 05
06. Contrast
k
g
00 to 64
19. Auto Configuration
j
u
01
07. Brightness
k
h
00 to 64
20. Tune Command
m
a
(See p.152)
08. Colour
k
i
00 to 64
21. Programme
m
Add/Skip
b
00 to 01
09. Tint
k
j
00 to 64
22. Key
m
c
Key Code
m
g
00 to 64
k
k
00 to 64
23. Control
Back Light
11. OSD Select k
l
00 to 01
24. Input select
x
(Main)
b
(See p.153)
12. Remote
Control Lock
Mode
k
m
00 to 01
25. 3D
x
t
(See p.154)
13. Treble
k
r
00 to 64
26. Extended
3D
x
v
(See p.154)
10. Sharpness
yy
Note : During USB operations such as DivX or EMF, all commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc)
are not executed and treated as NG.
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
149
Transmission / Receiving Protocol
Transmission
[Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
[Command 1]
[Command 2]
[Set ID]
: First command to control the TV.(j, k, m or x)
: Second command to control the TV.
: You can adjust the set ID to choose desired monitor ID number in option menu.
Adjustment range is 1 to 99. When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every connected set is controlled.
Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to 0x63) on
transmission/receiving protocol.
[DATA] : To transmit command data. Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of command.
[Cr] : Carriage Return
ASCII code ‘0x0D’
[ ]
: ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’
OK Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x]
Error Acknowledgement
[Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x]
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving abnormal data from
non-viable functions or communication errors.
Data00: Illegal Code
ENGLISH
ENG
* The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving normal data. At this
time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it
returns the data of the PC computer.
150
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
01. Power (Command: k a)
04. Volume Mute (Command: k e)
►► To control Power On/Off of the set.
►► To control volume mute on/off.
You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on
remote control.
Transmission[k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Power Off
01 : Power On
Ack [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
►► To show Power On/Off.
Transmission [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr]
Ack [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data based
on this format, Acknowledgement data feed back
presents status about each function.
* OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may display
on the screen when TV is power On.
Transmission [k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off)
01 : Volume mute off (Volume on)
Ack [e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
05. Volume Control (Command: k f)
►► To adjust volume.
You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME buttons on remote control.
Transmission [k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
02. Aspect Ratio (Command: k c) (Main Picture Size)
►► To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format)
You can also adjust the screen format using the
Aspect Ratio in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu.
ENGLISH
ENG
Transmission [k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data
01 : Normal screen (4:3)
02 : Wide screen (16:9)
06 : Original
07 : 14:9
09 : Just Scan
0B : Full Wide
10 to 1F : Cinema Zoom 1 to 16
Ack [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3
screen aspect ratio.
* In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50Hz / 60
Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz),
Component( 720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz) mode,
Just Scan is available.
* Full Wide is supported only for Digital, Analogue, AV.
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
06. Contrast (Command: k g)
►► To adjust screen contrast.
You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
07. Brightness (Command: k h)
►► To adjust screen brightness.
You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE
menu.
Transmission [k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
03. Screen Mute (Command: k d)
►► To select screen mute on/off.
Transmission [k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Screen mute off (Picture on)
Video mute off
01 : Screen mute on (Picture off)
10 : Video mute on
Ack [d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case of video mute on only, TV will display On
Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute
on, TV will not display OSD.
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
08. Colour (Command: k i)
►► To adjust the screen colour.
You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
09. Tint (Command: k j)
13. Treble (Command: k r)
►► To adjust the screen tint.
You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu.
►► To adjust treble.
You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Red : 00 to Green : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
151
Transmission [k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
10. Sharpness (Command: k k)
►► To adjust the screen sharpness.
You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
14. Bass (Command: k s)
►► To adjust bass.
You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
15. Balance (Command: k t)
►► To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when controlling
remotely.
►► To adjust balance.
You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu.
Transmission [k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : OSD off
01 : OSD on
Ack [l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Transmission [k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
12. Remote control lock mode (Command: k m)
►► To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and remote
control.
16. Colour Temperature (Command: x u)
►► To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour
Temperature in the PICTURE menu.
Transmission [k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data 00 : Lock off
01 : Lock on
Ack [m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* If you are not using the remote control, use this mode.
When main power is on/off, external control lock is
released.
* In the standby mode, if key lock is on, TV will not turn
on by power on key of IR & Local Key.
Transmission [x][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
* Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
ENGLISH
ENG
11. OSD Select (Command: k l)
152
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
17. ISM Method (Command: j p) (Plasma TV only)
19. Auto Configure(Command: j u)
►► To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM
Method in OPTION menu.
►► To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking
automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode.
Transmission [j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data
02:
04:
08:
20:
Transmission [j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Orbiter
White wash
Normal
Colour Wash
Data 01: To set
Ack [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack [p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
ENGLISH
ENG
18. Energy Saving (Command: j q)
20. Tune Command (Command: m a)
►► To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can also
adjust Energy Saving in PICTURE menu.
►► Select channel to following physical number.
Transmission [j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Power Saving
Function
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Level
Description
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Off
0
0
0
1
Minimum
0
0
1
0
Medium
0
0
1
1
Maximum
Low
Power
0
1
0
0
Auto
(Only LED
LCD TV /
LCD TV)
0
1
0
1
Screen Off
0
1
0
0
Intelligent
Sensor
(Only
Plasma TV)
Low
Power
Low
Power
Low
Power
Low
Power
0
0
0
0
Low
Power
0
0
0
0
Low
Power
Ack [q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Transmission [m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr]
Data00
Data01
ex.
Data02
: High channel data
: Low channel data
No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH)
No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH),
DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care
:
0x00
0x10
0x20
0x80
0x90
0xa0
0x40
0x50
ATV main
DTV main
Radio main
CATV main
CADTV main
CA-Radio main
Sat DTV main
Sat Radio main
Channel data range
Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: C7 (0 to 199)
Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999)
Ack [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b)
►► To set skip status for the current Programme.
23. C
ontrol Back Light(Command: m g)
(Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
►► To Control the back light.
Transmission [m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Transmission [m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data00 : Skip
01 : Add
153
Data Min : 00 to Max : 64
Ack [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
Ack [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* Real data mapping
00 :
Step 0
A:
Step 10 (Set ID 10)
F:
Step 15 (Set ID 15)
10 :
Step 16 (Set ID 16)
64 :
Step 100
6E : Step 110
Step 115
74 :
Step 116
CF : Step 199
FE : Step 254
FF : Step 255
►► To select input source for main picture.
Transmission [x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data
Data
0x00
0x01
0x02
0x10
0x11
0x20
0x21
0x22
0x40
0x41
0x42
0x60
0x70/80/90/a0
0x71/81/91/a1
0x72/82/92/a2
0x73/83/93/a3
Input
DTV
CADTV
Sat DTV
ATV
CATV
AV1
AV2
AV3
Component1
Component2
Component3
RGB
HDMI1
HDMI2
HDMI3
HDMI4
Ack [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
22. Key(Command: m c)
►► To send IR remote key code.
Transmission [m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr]
Data Key code (See p.145)
Ack [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x]
* In case external input data is DTV, Input number ‘0’ is
AIR, ‘1’ is CATV and ‘2’ is SATELLITE.
ENGLISH
ENG
73 :
24. Input select (Command: x b)
(Main Picture Input)
154
EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP
25. 3D (Command: x t) (only 3D models)
26. Extended 3D (Command: x v) (only 3D models)
►► To change 3D mode for TV.
►► To change 3D option for TV.
Transmission [x][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data01][ ][Data02]
[ ][Data03][ ][Data04][Cr]
Data01 00 : 3D On
01 : 3D Off
02 : 3D to 2D
03 : 2D to 3D
Data02 00 : Top and Bottom
01 : Side by Side
02 : Check Board
03 : Frame Sequential
Data03 00 : Right to Left
01 : Left to Right
Data04 3D Depth : Min: 0 to Max: 14
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
*If data1 is 00(3D On), data4 has no meaning.
*If data1 is 01(3D off) or 02(3D to 2D), data2, data3 and
data4 have no meaning.
*If data1 is 03(2D to 3D), data2 and data3 have no
meaning.
ENGLISH
ENG
Data1
Data2
00
O
01
X
02
X
03
X
X : don't care
Data3
O
X
X
X
Data4
X
X
X
O
Ack [t][ ][OK][Data01][Data02][Data03][Data04][x]
[t][ ][NG][Data01][x]
Transmission [x][v][ ][Set ID][ ][Data01][ ]
[Data02][Cr]
Data01 : 3D option
00 : 3D Picture Correction
01 : 3D Depth (2D to 3D Only)
02 : 3D Viewpoint
03 : 3D Picture Size (Only Plasma TV)
04 : 3D Picture Balance (Only Plasma TV)
05 : 3D Optimization (Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
Data02It has own range for each 3D option determined by
Data01.
1) When Data01 is 00
00 : Right to Left
01 : Left to Right
2) When Data01 is 01
Data Min: 0 to Max: 14
3) When Data01 is 02
Data Min: 0 to Max: 14
Data value range(0 to 20) converts Viewpoint range(-10 to
10) automatically.
4) When Data01 is 03 (Only Plasma TV)
00 : Just Scan
01 : 16:9
5) When Data01 is 04 (Only Plasma TV)
00 : Off
01 : On
6) When Data01 is 05 (Only LED LCD TV / LCD TV)
Data Min: 0 to Max: 02
*Refer to ‘Real data mapping’. (See p.153)
Ack [v][ ][OK][Data01][Data02][x][v][ ][NG]
[Data01][x]
* Use the feature depending on your model.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
155
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Please be informed that LG Electronics products
may contain open source software listed in the
tables below.
License
Component
Apache license
bonjour
MIT license
cares
fontconfig
libcurl
libxml2
libxslt
lua interpreter
expat license
expat
Freetype license freetype
JPEG license
libjpeg
OpenSSL license openssl
libmng
libpng
zlib
portmap license
portmap
pixman license
pixman
X.net license
libicu
BSD license
netBSD
Simple XML Parser
xySSL
RSA Data secuMD5
rity license
JSON license
JSON
MS92 license
snacc
License
Component
Linux kernel 2.6
busybox
e2fsprogs
gdbserver
jfsutils
GNU GPL v2.0
lzo
msdl 1.1
mtd-utils
ntpclient
procps
atk
directFB
ffmpeg
glib
gnuTLS
gail
GTK+
iconv
libintl
GNU LGPL v2.1
libgcrypt
libgpg-error
libgphoto2
libsoup
pango
pyenchant
qt
uClibc
webkit
MPL 1.1
cairo
nanox
mozilla firefox
zziplib
ENGLISH
ENG
Zlib/libpng
license
LG Electronics products may also contain open
source software listed as Components in the
table below, and you may download the complete
source code thereof free of charge, from LG
Electronics website (http://opensource.lge.com) for
a period of three (3) years from our last shipment
of this product. Please be informed that the open
source software is subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable open source licenses, which
are provided to you hereinbelow.
156
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 021101301, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
ENGLISH
ENG
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public License is
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software
is free for all its users. This General Public License
applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's
software and to any other program whose authors
commit to using it. (Some other Free Software
Foundation software is covered by the GNU
Lesser General Public License instead.) You can
apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do
these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or
to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you
if you distribute copies of the software, or if you
modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a
program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. And you must show them these
terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright
the software, and (2) offer you this license which
gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/
or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we
want to make certain that everyone understands
that there is no warranty for this free software.
If the software is modified by someone else and
passed on, we want its recipients to know that
what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on
the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly
by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger
that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
program proprietary. To prevent this, we have
made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other
work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under
the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or
work, and a "work based on the Program" means
either the Program or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee
is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the
Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether
that is true depends on what the Program does.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies
of the Program's source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and
to the absence of any warranty; and give any other
recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the
Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Program, and copy and distribute
such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
the same sections as part of a whole which is a
work based on the Program, the distribution of
the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to
the entire whole, and thus to each and every part
regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim
rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Program with the Program (or with
a work based on the Program) on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a
work based on it, under Section 2) in object code
or executable form under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above provided that you also do one of the
following:
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or
publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties
under the terms of this License.
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must
be distributed under the terms of Sections 1
and 2 above on a medium customarily used for
software interchange; or,
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause
it, when started running for such interactive use
in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or
else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that
users may redistribute the program under these
conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy
of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is
interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is
not required to print an announcement.)
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give any third party, for
a charge no more than your cost of physically
performing source distribution, a complete
machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
These requirements apply to the modified work as
a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Program, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute
them as separate works. But when you distribute
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed
only for noncommercial distribution and only
if you received the program in object code or
executable form with such an offer, in accord
with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred
form of the work for making modifications to it. For
an executable work, complete source code means
all the source code for all modules it contains, plus
ENGLISH
ENG
a) You must cause the modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
157
158
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation
of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either
source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made
by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy
the source code from the same place counts as
distribution of the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
ENGLISH
ENG
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License,
since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute
the Program or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing
the Program (or any work based on the Program),
you indicate your acceptance of this License to
do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works
based on it.
son (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so
as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations,
then as a consequence you may not distribute the
Program at all. For example, if a patent license
would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the
Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to
refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you
to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims;
this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system,
which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to
the wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he
or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or
any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program
subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are
not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties to this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright
holder who places the Program under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other rea-
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the General Public
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Program specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose
any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED
FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK
AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAM-
AGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES
SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE
WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
ENGLISH
ENG
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution
conditions are different, write to the author to ask
for permission. For software which is copyrighted
by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make
exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by
the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting
the sharing and reuse of software generally.
159
160
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
GNU Lesser General Public License
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy
and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser
GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
ENGLISH
ENG
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it.
By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use
it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to
use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring
to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that
you can change the software and use pieces of it
in new free programs; and that you are informed
that you can do these things.
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You
must make sure that they, too, receive or can get
the source code. If you link other code with the
library, you must provide complete object files to
the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1)
we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very
clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and
passed on, the recipients should know that what
they have is not the original version, so that the
original author's reputation will not be affected by
problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat
to the existence of any free program. We wish
to make sure that a company cannot effectively
restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a
restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries,
is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General
Public License, applies to certain designated
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary
General Public License. We use this license for
certain libraries in order to permit linking those
libraries into non-free programs.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these
rights or to ask you to surrender these rights.
These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or
if you modify it.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination
of the two is legally speaking a combined work,
a derivative of the original library. The ordinary
General Public License therefore permits such
linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria
of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with
the library.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License.
It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for many
libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use
of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case
is that a free library does the same job as widely
used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little
to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public
License.
Although the Lesser General Public License is
Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with
the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal
to run that program using a modified version of the
Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based
on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the
library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
party saying it may be distributed under the terms
of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License"). Each licensee is addressed as
"you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some
of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is
included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred
form of the work for making modifications to it.
For a library, complete source code means all the
source code for all modules it contains, plus any
associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the
library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of
the Library's complete source code as you receive
it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously
and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License
and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute
a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the
ENGLISH
ENG
In other cases, permission to use a particular
library in non-free programs enables a greater
number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C
Library in non-free programs enables many more
people to use the whole GNU operating system,
as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating
system.
161
162
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work
based on the Library, and copy and distribute such
modifications or work under the terms of Section
1 above, provided that you also meet all of these
conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the
files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under
the terms of this License.
ENGLISH
ENG
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other
than as an argument passed when the facility
is invoked, then you must make a good faith
effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the
facility still operates, and performs whatever
part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely
well-defined independent of the application.
Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
application-supplied function or table used by
this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function
must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work
as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work
are not derived from the Library, and can be
reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License,
and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works.
But when you distribute the same sections as
part of a whole which is a work based on the
Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions
for other licensees extend to the entire whole,
and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim
rights or contest your rights to work written
entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise
the right to control the distribution of derivative
or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work
not based on the Library with the Library (or with
a work based on the Library) on a volume of a
storage or distribution medium does not bring the
other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this,
you must alter all the notices that refer to this
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to
this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of
the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if
you wish.) Do not make any other change in these
notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or
a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in
object code or executable form under the terms
of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
accompany it with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code, which must be
distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above on a medium customarily used for software
interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place satisfies the requirement to
distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
the Library by being compiled or linked with it,
is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a
work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the
Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of
this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions
of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the
library". The executable is therefore covered by
this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution
of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work
of the Library even though the source code is not.
Whether this is true is especially significant if the
work can be linked without the Library, or if the
work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be
true is not precisely defined by law.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section 6,
whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may
also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under
terms of your choice, provided that the terms
permit modification of the work for the customer's
own use and reverse engineering for debugging
such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of
the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License.
You must supply a copy of this License. If the work
during execution displays copyright notices, you
must include the copyright notice for the Library
among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do
one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were
used in the work (which must be distributed
under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library,
with the complete machine-readable "work
that uses the Library", as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It
is understood that the user who changes the
contents of definitions files in the Library will
not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the
library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate
properly with a modified version of the library,
if the user installs one, as long as the modified
version is interface-compatible with the version
that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer,
valid for at least three years, to give the same
user the materials specified in Subsection 6a,
above, for a charge no more than the cost of
performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received
a copy of these materials or that you have
already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work
that uses the Library" must include any data and
utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception,
ENGLISH
ENG
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and
small macros and small inline functions (ten lines
or less in length), then the use of the object file
is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally
a derivative work. (Executables containing this
object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
163
164
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
the materials to be distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either
source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating
system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts
the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries
that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use
both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single
library together with other library facilities not
covered by this License, and distribute such a
combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the
other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and
provided that you do these two things:
ENGLISH
ENG
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must
be distributed under the terms of the Sections
above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work based
on the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same
work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link
with, or distribute the Library except as expressly
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from
you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License,
since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute
the Library or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing
the Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any
work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor
to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library
subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are
not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions
are imposed on you (whether by court order,
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you
from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent
license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies
directly or indirectly through you, then the only way
you could satisfy both it and this License would be
to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you
to infringe any patents or other property right
claims or to contest validity of any such claims;
this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
integrity of the free software distribution system
which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to
the wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of that
system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he
or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or
by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright
holder who places the Library under this License
may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this
License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version,
but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library
into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the
author to ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and
of promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED
FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST
OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF
THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to
be of the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone
can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices
to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start
of each source file to most effectively convey the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have
at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library's name and an idea
of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name
ENGLISH
ENG
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version number
of this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the
terms and conditions either of that version or of
any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a
license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
165
166
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will
be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU
Lesser General Public License along with this
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307 USA
ENGLISH
ENG
Also add information on how to contact you by
electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work
as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That's all there is to it!
Mozilla Public License 1.1 (MPL
1.1)
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use"
means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. ''Contributor''
means each entity that creates or contributes to
the creation of Modifications.
1.2. ''Contributor Version''
means the combination of the Original Code, prior
Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. ''Covered Code''
means the Original Code or Modifications or the
combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. ''Electronic Distribution Mechanism''
means a mechanism generally accepted in the
software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. ''Executable''
means Covered Code in any form other than
Source Code.
1.6. ''Initial Developer''
means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required
by Exhibit A.
1.7. ''Larger Work''
means a work which combines Covered Code or
portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. ''License''
means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable"
means having the right to grant, to the maximum
extent possible, whether at the time of the initial
grant or subsequently
acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed
herein.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
1.9. ''Modifications''
means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or
any previous Modifications. When Covered Code
is released as a series of files, a Modification
is:
(a) Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications.
(b) Any new file that contains any part of the
Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. ''Original Code''
means Source Code of computer software code
which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which,
at the time of its release under this License is not
already Covered Code governed by this License.
1.11. ''Source Code''
means the preferred form of the Covered Code for
making modifications to it, including all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition
files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential
comparisons against either the Original Code or
another well known, available Covered Code of
the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be
in a compressed
or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You'' (or "Your")
means an individual or a legal entity exercising
rights under, and complying with all of the terms
of, this License or a future version of this License
issued under Section 6.1.For legal entities, "You''
includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For
purposes of this definition, "control'' means (a) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty per-
cent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject
to third party intellectual property claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights (other
than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display,
perform, sublicense and distribute the Original
Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make,
have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for
sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original
Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a)
and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the
terms of this License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no
patent license is granted: 1) for code that You
delete from the Original Code; 2) separate
from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements
caused by: i) the modification of the Original
Code or ii) the combination of the Original
Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims,
each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide,
royalty-free, non-exclusive license
(a) under intellectual property rights (other than
patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform,
sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof)
either on an unmodified basis, with other
Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part
of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by
ENGLISH
ENG
1.10.1. "Patent Claims"
means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method,
process, and apparatus claims, in any patent
Licensable by grantor.
167
168
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions
of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer
for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose
of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor
(or portions thereof); and 2) the combination
of Modifications made by that Contributor with
its Contributor Version (or portions of such
combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and
2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first
makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
ENGLISH
ENG
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no
patent license is granted: 1) for any code that
Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor
Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third
party modifications of Contributor Version or ii)
the combination of Modifications made by that
Contributor with other software (except as part
of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or
4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered
Code in the absence of Modifications made by
that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which
You contribute are governed by the terms of this
License, including without limitation Section 2.2.
The Source Code version of Covered Code may
be distributed only under the terms of this License
or a future version of this License released under
Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this
License with every copy of the Source Code You
distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms
on any Source Code version that alters or restricts
the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include
an additional document offering the additional
rights described in Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You
contribute must be made available in Source Code
form under the terms of this License either on the
same media as an Executable version or via an
accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to
anyone to whom you made an Executable version
available; and if made available via Electronic
Distribution Mechanism,
must remain available for at least twelve (12)
months after the date it initially became available,
or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made
available to such recipients. You are responsible
for ensuring that the Source Code version remains
available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the
date of any change. You must include a prominent
statement that the Modification is derived, directly
or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the
Initial Developer and including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b)
in any notice in an Executable version or related
documentation in which You describe the origin or
ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under
a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must
include a text file with the Source Code distribution
titled "LEGAL'' which describes the claim and the
party making the claim in sufficient detail that a
recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor
obtains such knowledge after the Modification is
made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all
copies Contributor makes available thereafter and
shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered
Code that new knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an application
programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably
necessary to implement that API, Contributor must
also include this information in the LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed
pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contribu-
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
tor believes that Contributor's Modifications are
Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor
has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by
this License.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable
form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5
have been met for that Covered Code, and if You
include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the
terms of this License, including a description of
how and where You have fulfilled the obligations
of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously
included in any notice in an Executable version,
related documentation or collateral in which You
describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered
Code. You may distribute the Executable version
of Covered Code or ownership rights under a
license of Your choice, which may contain terms
different from this License, provided that You are
in compliance with the terms of this License and
that the license for the Executable version does
not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in
the Source Code version from the rights set forth
in this License. If You distribute the Executable
version under a different license You must make
it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from
this License are offered by You alone, not by the
Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby
agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every
Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial
Developer or such Contributor as a result of any
such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code not governed by
the terms of this License and distribute the Larger
Work as a single product. In such a case, You
must make sure the requirements of this License
are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the
terms of this License with respect to some or all
of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order,
or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the
terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code
they affect. Such description must be included in
the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must
be included with all distributions of the Source
Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute
or regulation, such description must be sufficiently
detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able
to understand it.
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and
to related Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation (''Netscape'') may publish revised and/or new versions
of the License from time to time. Each version will
be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under a
particular version of the License, You may always
continue to use it under the terms of that version.
You may also choose to use such Covered Code
ENGLISH
ENG
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each
file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put
such notice in a particular
Source Code file due to its structure, then You
must include such notice in a location (such as a
relevant directory) where a user would be likely
to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more Modification(s) You may add your name as
a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit
A. You must also duplicate this License in any
documentation for the Source Code where You
describe recipients' rights or ownership rights
relating to Covered Code. You may choose to
offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support,
indemnity or liability obligations to one or more
recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do
so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of
the Initial Developer or any Contributor You must
make it absolutely clear than any such warranty,
support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered
by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify
the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such
Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
169
170
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
under the terms of any subsequent version of the
License published by Netscape. No one other than
Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this
License (which you may only do in order to apply
it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your
license so that the phrases ''Mozilla'', ''MOZILLAPL'', ''MOZPL'', ''Netscape'', "MPL", ''NPL'' or
any confusingly similar phrase do not appear
in your license (except to note that your license
differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make
it clear that Your version of the license contains
terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License
and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name
of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of
themselves be deemed to be modifications of this
License.)
ENGLISH
ENG
7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY.
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS'' BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS
FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU
(NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS
LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS
AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER
THIS DISCLAIMER.
8. TERMINATION.
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder
will terminate automatically if You fail to comply
with terms herein and fail
to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the
Covered Code which are properly granted shall
survive any termination of this License. Provisions
which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent
infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment
actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor
(the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom
You file such action is referred to as "Participant")
alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then
any and all rights granted by such Participant
to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this
License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within
60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i)
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past
and future use of Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim
with respect to the Contributor Version against
such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a
reasonable royalty and payment arrangement
are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the
parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn,
the rights granted by Participant to You under
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate
at the expiration of the 60 day notice period
specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other
than such Participant's Contributor Version,
directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then
any rights granted to You by such Participant
under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked
effective as of the date You first made, used,
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim
against Participant alleging that such Participant's
Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes
any patent where such claim is resolved (such as
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of
patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable
value of the licenses granted by such Participant
under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any
payment or license. 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user
license agreements (excluding distributors and
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
resellers) which have been validly granted by You
or any distributor hereunder prior to termination
shall survive termination.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS.
The Covered Code is a ''commercial item,'' as that
term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995),
consisting of ''commercial computer software'' and
''commercial computer software documentation,''
as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept.
1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June
1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire
Covered Code with only those rights set forth
herein.
11. MISCELLANEOUS.
This License represents the complete agreement
concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision
of this License is held to be unenforceable, such
provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall
be governed by California law provisions (except
to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With
respect to disputes in which at least one party is
a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to
do business in the United States of America, any
litigation relating to this License shall be subject to
the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa
Clara County, California, with the losing party
responsible for costs, including without limitation,
court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and
expenses. The application of the United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale
of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not
apply to this License.
12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS.
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors,
each party is responsible for claims and damages
arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of
rights under this License and You agree to work
with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute
such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing
herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute
any admission of liability.
13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as Multiple-Licensed. MultipleLicensed means that the Initial Developer permits
you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under
Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses,
if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file
described in Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the
License for the specific language governing rights
and limitations under the License.
The Original Code is _______________________
ENGLISH
ENG
9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE,
SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR
OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY
OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON
FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK
STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH
PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO
LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE
TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS
SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION
OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
171
172
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
ENGLISH
ENG
_______________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
________________________.
Portions created by ______________________
are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________.All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s): ____________________________
__________.
Apache License Version 2.0
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms
of the _____ license (the [___] License), in which
case the
provisions of [______] License are applicable
instead of those
above.If you wish to allow use of your version of
this file only
under the terms of the [____] License and not to
allow others to use
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate
your decision by
deleting the provisions above and replace them
with the notice and
other provisions required by the [___] License. If
you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] License."
1. Definitions.
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly
from the text of the notices in the Source Code
files of the Original Code. You should use the text
of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity
authorized by the copyright owner that is granting
the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting
entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that
entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control"
means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity, whether
by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty
percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares,
or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal
Entity exercising permissions granted by this
License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for
making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from
mechanical transformation or translation of a
Source form, including but not limited to compiled
object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether
in Source or Object form, made available under
the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that
is included in or attached to the work (an example
is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether
in Source or Object form, that is based on (or
derived from) the Work and for which the editorial
revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of
authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to
the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative
Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide,
non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license
to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell,
import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where
such license applies only to those patent claims
licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or
by combination of their Contribution(s) with the
Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any
entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in
a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution
incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or
contributory patent infringement, then any patent
licenses granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation
is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof
in any medium, with or without modifications, and
in Source or Object form, provided that You meet
the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of
the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices stating that You changed the
files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices
from the Source form of the Work, excluding
those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file
as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include
a readable copy of the attribution notices
contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any
part of the Derivative Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works;
within the Source form or documentation, if
provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative
Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do
not modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that
You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to
the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that
such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to
Your modifications and may provide additional
or different license terms and conditions for use,
reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications,
or for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution
of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions
stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explic-
ENGLISH
ENG
thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship,
including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the
copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity
authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright
owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or
written communication sent to the Licensor or its
representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that
are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for
the purpose of discussing and improving the Work,
but excluding communication that is conspicuously
marked or otherwise designated in writing by the
copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
173
174
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
itly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally
submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the
Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions
of this License, without any additional terms or
conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing
herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant
permission to use the trade names, trademarks,
service marks, or product names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and customary
use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
ENGLISH
ENG
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by
applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor
provides the Work (and each Contributor provides
its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied, including, without
limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE,
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You
are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and
assume any risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no
legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent
acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor
be liable to You for damages, including any direct,
indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this
License or out of the use or inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for loss
of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability.
While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works
thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee
for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such
obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf
and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of
any other Contributor, and only if You agree to
indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor
harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
MIT license
- cares
Copyright 1998 by the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software and its documentation for any purpose
and without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that copyright notice and this permission
notice appear in supporting documentation, and
that the name of M.I.T. not be used in advertising
or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software
without specific, written prior permission. M.I.T.
makes no representations about the suitability of
this software for any purpose.
It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
KEITH PACKARD DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT
SHALL KEITH PACKARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS
SOFTWARE.
- libcurl
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all
copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
- libxml2
Copyright (C) 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All
Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
ENGLISH
ENG
- fontconfig
Copyright (c) 2000 Keith Packard
Copyright (c) 2005 Patrick Lam
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and
sell this software and its documentation for any
purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided
that the above copyright notice appear in all copies
and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation,
and that the name of Keith Packard not be used
in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific, written prior
permission. Keith Packard makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any
purpose.
It is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
175
176
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from him
- libxslt
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard.
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Thomas Broyer, Charlie
Bozeman and Daniel Veillard.
ENGLISH
ENG
All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Daniel Veillard shall not be used in advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from him.
- lua interpreter
Copyright © 1994–2010 Lua.org, PUC-Rio.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
177
Expat license
The FreeType Project LICENSE
The source package was downloaded from
<URL:http://expat.sourceforge.net>.
Copyright 1996-2002, 2006 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
The original packager is Adam Di Carlo <aph@
debian.org>.
The current maintainer is Ardo van Rangelrooij
<ardo@debian.org>.
Introduction
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers.
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation and
makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and
IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free software
in commercial and freeware products alike. As a
consequence, its main points are that:
- We don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be interested in any kind of
bug reports. (`as is' distribution)
- You can use this software for whatever you
want, in parts or full form, without having to pay
us. (`royalty-free' usage)
- You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a
program, you must acknowledge somewhere
in your documentation that you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion
of this software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products. We disclaim all warranties
covering The FreeType Project and assume no
liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form
for a credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with
this license. We thus encourage you to use the
following text:
Portions of this software are copyright <year>
The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). All
rights reserved.
Please replace <year> with the value from the
FreeType version you actually use.
ENGLISH
ENG
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages; some of them may contain, in
addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools
and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project.
178
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Legal Terms
0. Definitions
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project' and `FreeType archive' refer to
the set of files originally distributed by the authors
(David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as
alpha, beta or final release.
ENGLISH
ENG
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term including
compiling the project's source code as well as
linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This
program is referred to as `a program using the
FreeType engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType Project, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified
form as distributed in the original archive. If you
are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify
this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000
by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified
below.
1. No Warranty
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED
`AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE
FREETYPE PROJECT.
2. Redistribution
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free,
perpetual and irrevocable right and license to use,
execute, perform, compile, display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and sublicense
the FreeType Project (in both source and object
code forms) and derivative works thereof for any
purpose; and to authorize others to exercise some
or all of the rights granted herein, subject to the
following conditions:
- Redistribution of source code must retain this
license file (`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any addi-
tions, deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in all
copies of source files.
- Redistribution in binary form must provide
a disclaimer that states that the software is
based in part of the work of the FreeType
Team, in the distribution documentation. We
also encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on the FreeType Project, not just
the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must
acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to
us.
3. Advertising
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor
you shall use the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional purposes without
specific prior written permission. We suggest, but
do not require, that you use one or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType
Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or
`FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are not
required to accept it. However, as the FreeType
Project is copyrighted material, only this license,
or another one contracted with the authors, grants
you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the
FreeType Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license.
4. Contacts
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions
to the library and distribution. If you are looking
for support, start in this list if you haven't found
anything to help you in the documentation.
freetype-devel@nongnu.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at http://www.
freetype.org
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
179
JPEG license
OpenSSL License
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas
G. Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL
Project" must not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without prior
written permission. For written permission, please
contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be
called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in
their names without prior written permission of the
OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must
retain the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT
OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
ENGLISH
ENG
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this software (or portions thereof) for
any purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this
software is distributed, then this README file
must be included, with this copyright and nowarranty notice unaltered; and any additions,
deletions, or changes to the original files must
be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then
the accompanying documentation must state
that "this software is based in part on the work
of the Independent JPEG Group".
(3) Permission for use of this software is
granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences; the
authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of
any kind.
180
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by
Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
ENGLISH
ENG
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are
aheared to. The following conditions apply to all
code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation included with this distribution
is covered by the same copyright terms except
that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such
any Copyright notices in the code are not to be
removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric
Young should be given attribution as the author
of the parts of the library used. This can be in the
form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgement:
"This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the
rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a
derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
"This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC
YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be
copied and put under another distribution licence
[including the GNU Public Licence.]
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
181
zlib/libpng License
Portmap license
This product may contain open source software
licensed under zlib/libpng License.
Most of the files, fall under the following copyright,
and are distributable under the terms of the BSD
license.
Libmng : Copyright © 2000-2008 Gerard Juyn
(gerard@libmng.com)
Libpng : Copyright (c) 1998-2008 Glenn RandersPehrson
(Version 0.96 Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas
Dilger)
(Version 0.88 Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric
Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.)
Zlib : Copyright (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly
and Mark Adler
1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote
the original software. If you use this software in
a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must not be misrepresented as being
the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from
any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
Some of the RPC code, is copyrighted by Sun
Microsystems, and is provided under the following
terms:
Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
and is provided for unrestricted use provided that
this legend is included on all tape media and as a
part of the software program in whole or part. Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge,
but are not authorized to license or distribute it to
anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user or with the express
written consent of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN, MERCHANTIBILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR
ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE.
Sun RPC is provided with no support and without
any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. to assist in its use, correction, modification or
enhancement.
SUN MICROSYSTEMS, INC. SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS, TRADE SECRETS
OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR ANY PART
THEREOF.
In no event will Sun Microsystems, Inc. be liable
for any lost revenue or profits or other special, indirect and consequential damages, even if Sun has
been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Sun Microsystems, Inc.
2550 Garcia Avenue
ENGLISH
ENG
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely,
subject to the following restrictions:
Copyright (c) 1983,1991 The Regents of the University of California. ll rights reserved.
182
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
Pixman license
X.net license
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989, 1998 The Open
Group
Copyright 1987, 1988, 1989 Digital Equipment
Corporation
Copyright 1999, 2004, 2008 Keith Packard
Copyright 2000 SuSE, Inc.
Copyright 2000 Keith Packard, member of The
XFree86 Project, Inc.
Copyright 2004, 2005, 2007, 2008 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright 2004 Nicholas Miell
Copyright 2005 Lars Knoll & Zack Rusin, Trolltech
Copyright 2005 Trolltech AS
Copyright 2007 Luca Barbato
Copyright 2008 Aaron Plattner, NVIDIA Corporation
Copyright 2008 Rodrigo Kumpera
Copyright 2008 André Tupinambá
Copyright 2008 Mozilla Corporation
Copyright 2008 Frederic Plourde
Copyright 2009 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Copyright (c) 1995-2001 International Business
Machines Corporation and others
All rights reserved.
ENGLISH
ENG
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next paragraph) shall be
included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, provided that
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear in all copies of the Software and
that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN
THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR
ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization of the copyright holder.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
BSD license
- netBSD
Copyright (c) 1998 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc.
All rights reserved.
This code is derived from software contributed to
The NetBSD Foundation by Lennart Augustsson
(lennart@augustsson.net) at Carlstedt Research &
Technology.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE NETBSD FOUNDATION, INC. AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
OWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT
OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- Simple XML Parser
Copyright (c) 2001-2002 Bruno Essmann <essmann@users.sourceforge.net>
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
- xyssl
Copyright (C) 2006-2008 Christophe Devine
Copyright (C) 2009 Paul Bakker <polarssl_maintainer at polarssl dot org>
All rights reserved.
ENGLISH
ENG
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by
the NetBSD Foundation, Inc. and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of The NetBSD Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written
permission.
183
184
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
ENGLISH
ENG
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
3. Neither the names of PolarSSL or XySSL
nor the names of its contributors may be used
to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
RSA Data Security license
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN
IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this
software or the suitability of this software for any
particular purpose. It is provided "as is" without
express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of
any part of this documentation and/or software.
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted
provided that it is identified as the "RSA Data
Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in
all material mentioning or referencing this software
or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified
as "derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5
Message-Digest Algorithm" in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
OPEN SOURCE LICENSE
185
JSON license
MS92 license
Copyright (c) 2005 JSON.org
Copyright (C) 1992 Michael Sample and the University of British Columbia
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject
to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or substantial
portions of the Software.
This library is free software; you can redistribute it
and/or modify it provided that this copyright/license
information is retained in original form.
If you modify this file, you must clearly indicate
your changes.
This source code is distributed in the hope that it
will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
The Software shall be used for Good, not Evil.
ENGLISH
ENG
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
The model and serial numbers of the TV is
located on the back of the TV
Record it below should you ever need service.
MODEL
SERIAL
Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996)
Download PDF

advertising